Una publicación
Descripción de la publicación.
9/20/2025228 min read
Flow Cytometer
XF-1600
Instructions for Use
Code No. CD620558 en-eu
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Date of Issue or Revision: 06/2024
Document Version: 8.0
© SYSMEX CORPORATION Software Version: 0 onwards
Revision history
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
3/314
4
Revision history
03/2022
Initial issue
Document version: 1.0
Software version: 0
04/2022
Document version: 2.0
Software version: 0
08/2022
Document version: 3.0
Software version: 0
02/2023
Document version: 4.0
Software version: 0
03/2023
Document version: 5.0
Software version: 0
06/2023
Document version: 6.0
Software version: 0
02/2024
Document version: 7.0
Software version: 0
06/2024
Document version: 8.0
Software version: 0
Changes are listed below.
Other changes:
- Clarifications to text
Revised section Page
5.2 Reagent list 35
9.10.3 Displaying cytometer QC results 82
11.2 Overview of panel QC (baseline setup and daily panel QC) 132
11.8.3 Displaying daily panel QC results 158
11.8.6 Editing the most recent daily panel QC results 160
17.6 Cleaning 273
Revision history
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
4/314
Table of contents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
5/314
8
Table of contents
Revision history 3
Chapter 1 Introduction 9
1.1 Intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.2 Overview of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 About this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.5 Symbols related to the products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.6 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 2 Safety information 15
2.1 Specified conditions of use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5 Avoiding infection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.6 Handling of reagents and quality control materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 Laser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.9 Disposal of materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.10 Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.11 Computer viruses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.12 Use of other software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.13 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.14 Safety labels on the instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.15 Notice to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 3 Part names and functions 29
3.1 Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.2 IPU (Information Processing Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 4 Consumables, supply parts, and
options 33
4.1 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.2 Supply parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.3 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 5 Reagents 35
5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2 Reagent list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 6 Installation 37
6.1 Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table of contents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
6/314
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications 39
7.1 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
7.2 Supported sample tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.3 Supported rotors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapter 8 Basic operation 49
8.1 Overall operation workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8.2 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8.3 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8.4 Logging off from the IPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.5 Using screen lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.6 Main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.7 List of access privileges for each user authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup 63
9.1 Overall cytometer QC workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9.2 Overview of cytometer QC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.3 Overview of baseline setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.4 Overview of daily QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.5 QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.6 QC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.7 Registering lot information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
9.8 Performing baseline setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
9.9 Performing daily QC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9.10 Checking daily QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.11 Managing QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9.12 Backing up QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
9.13 Restoring saved QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.14 Saving daily QC results to an FCS file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.15 Saving baseline measurement results to an FCS file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and
workitems 89
10.1 Worklist area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2 Registering a panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
10.3 Registering subset panel analysis conditions while running a sample. . . . . . . . 98
10.4 Registering a workitem in the worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10.5 Modifying workitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
10.6 Filtering workitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
10.7 Sorting workitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
10.8 Searching for workitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.9 Deleting workitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10.10 Validating workitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.11 Reloading workitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.12 Saving validated workitems in FCS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.13 Outputting validated workitem data to the host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10.14 Backing up workitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10.15 Restoring a saved workitem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.16 Merging workitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.17 Configuring acquisition conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.18 Configuring compensation and creating plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.19 Updating the subset panel master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
10.20 Modifying panel/subset panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table of contents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
7/314
10.21 Copying panel/subset panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10.22 Deleting panel/subset panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.23 Backing up panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.24 Restoring a saved panel (restore) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Chapter 11 Panel QC 131
11.1 Overall panel QC workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.2 Overview of panel QC (baseline setup and daily panel QC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.3 Panel QC files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.4 Panel QC screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.5 Registering a panel and corresponding subset panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
11.6 Registering a panel QC file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.7 Performing daily panel QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.8 Checking daily panel QC results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
11.9 Managing panel QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11.10 Backing up panel QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
11.11 Restoring saved QC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Chapter 12 Running samples 163
12.1 Overview of measuring samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.2 Setting measurement conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.3 Running a sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools 177
13.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
13.2 Workarea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
13.3 Ribbon menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13.5 [Home] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
13.6 [View] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
13.7 [Compensation] tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
13.8 [Statistics] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
13.9 [Hierarchy] tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 14 Creating reports 209
14.1 Creating a report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
14.2 The [Report] tab of the ribbon menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Chapter 15 User settings 231
15.1 Settings by objective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
15.2 Settings available for each user authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
15.3 Opening the settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
15.4 IPU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.5 Analyzer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 16 Viewing logs 257
16.1 Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
16.2 History screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Table of contents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
8/314
Chapter 17 Maintenance 265
17.1 List of maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
17.3 Replacing the waste container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
17.4 Executing auto rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
17.5 Replacing reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
17.6 Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
17.7 Removing air bubbles from the flowcell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
17.8 Rinsing the flowcell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
17.9 Testing instrument operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
17.10 Replenishing the reagent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
17.11 Checking the cycle counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
17.12 Checking the instrument status (sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
17.13 Barcode reader test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
17.14 Replacing the air pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
17.15 Replacing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
17.16 Maintenance and inspection checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting 295
18.1 Error message list (in alphabetical order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
18.2 [Help] dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
18.3 Causes of errors and remedial actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Index 311
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
9/314
Chapter 1 Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Sysmex Flow Cytometer XF-1600. Please read this manual carefully before
operating this product, and keep it in a safe place for future reference.
In vitro diagnostic medical device
Contact Addresses
1-5-1 Wakinohama-Kaigandori, Chuo-ku, Kobe 651-0073, Japan
Authorized representatives
Europe, Middle East and Africa
Bornbarch 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany
Tel +49 40 5 27 26-0 / Fax +49 40 5 27 26-100
Americas
577 Aptakisic Road, Lincolnshire, IL 60069, U.S.A.
Tel +1-224-543-9500 / Fax +1-224-543-9505
Asia-Pacific
9 Tampines Grande #06-18 Singapore 528735
Tel +65-6221-3629 / Fax +65-6221-3687
Ordering of consumables/supply parts/options
If you need to order consumables, accessories, or options, please contact your
authorized local Sysmex representative.
Service and maintenance
Please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
The system described in this manual is marked with the CE mark, which
confirms compliance with the applicable requirements of:
• Regulation (EU) 2017/746 on in vitro diagnostic medical devices
• Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its related amending
directives including (EU) 2015/863 amending Annex II of Directive 2011/65/
EU
Note:
• Data generated by the XF-1600 is not intended to replace professional judgment in the determination of
a diagnosis or in monitoring patient therapy.
• Operate the instrument as instructed. Reliability of test results cannot be guaranteed if there are any
deviations from the instructions in this manual. If the instrument fails to function properly as a result of
either a user's operation not specified in this manual or a user's utilization of a program not specified by
Sysmex, the product warranty will be void.
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
10/314
1.1 Intended purpose
The Sysmex Flow Cytometer XF-1600 is intended for use as an in vitro diagnostic device for immunophenotyping.
It is equipped with 10 fluorescence detection channels and two light scatter channels by means of a blue (488
nm) laser, a red (638 nm) laser, and a violet (405 nm) laser. It is to be used by healthcare professionals and
properly trained personnel in a laboratory environment. It is intended to be used to analyze human specimens
in conjunction with appropriate antibody reagents to generate information that will serve as an aid to diagnosis,
monitoring, or prognosis. The Sysmex Flow Cytometer XF-1600 works as an automated analyzer to provide
quantitative results. Manual review of the results and visual inspection of the plots is recommended.
For appropriate use of the product, refer to the instructions for use of the applicable reagents.
1.2 Overview of the system
The instrument consists of an analyzer and an Information Processing Unit (IPU).
1.3 About this manual
The following manual is provided with this instrument.
1.3.1 Points to note about this manual
• You may not reproduce the contents of this manual in whole or in part without permission from Sysmex
Corporation.
• Images in this manual related to the product are for illustrative purposes only and may not exactly match the
product itself.
• While we have taken all possible precautions to ensure the quality of this manual, please contact your
authorized local Sysmex representative if you find any errors or omissions.
Caution
Diagnosis must be made using comprehensive judgment of all available information including but not
limited to immunophenotyping, pathological results, clinical symptoms, and patient history.
Type Description
Instructions for Use This manual explains how to operate the instrument.
Information
The English manual is provided with the instrument. For the translated most current version, please contact
your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
11/314
1.4 Symbols used in this manual
Risk of infection
Indicates a risk of pathogen infection that may ultimately lead to death if the user fails to observe the
indicated instructions.
Warning
Indicates a risk of death, serious injury, or serious property damage if the user fails to observe the indicated
instructions.
Caution
Indicates a risk of injury, incorrect output results, or property damage if the user fails to observe the
indicated instructions.
Caution, Hot
Indicates a risk of burns or other injury if the user fails to observe the indicated instructions.
Information
Indicates information for the purpose of maintaining instrument performance and preventing damage.
Note:
Indicates useful information for using the instrument.
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
12/314
1.5 Symbols related to the products
In vitro diagnostic medical device Keep away from sunlight
Manufacturer Use no hooks
Authorized Representative in
the European Community
This way up
Consult instructions for use Keep dry
Temperature limitation Stacking limit by number
Biological risks Fragile, handle with care
Use by Corrugated recycles
Batch code
Corrugated recycles*
* Based on SJ/T 11364 national
standard of China.
Catalogue number
Date of manufacture
Serial number
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
13/314
1.6 Trademarks
• Sysmex is a trademark of Sysmex Corporation, Japan.
• CyFlow is a trademark of Sysmex Corporation.
• ISBT 128 is a copyrighted system by and is used under a license agreement with International Council for
Commonality in Blood Banking Automation (ICCBBA).
• Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners.
The fact that a trademark is not explicitly indicated in this manual does not authorize its use. TM and ® are not
explicitly indicated in this manual.
Chapter 1 Introduction
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
14/314
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
15/314
Chapter 2 Safety information
This chapter describes precautions for the safe use of this instrument.
2.1 Specified conditions of use
This instrument is a medical device used for in vitro diagnosis.
For the sheath fluid, cleaning agent, and quality control material, use the Sysmex-specified reagents indicated in this
manual. The use of other reagents may cause tube clogging and deterioration.
The conditions of use include cleaning and maintenance at the intervals specified in this manual.
2.2 General information
Warning
• Keep your hair, fingers and clothing away from the instrument when it is in operation.
You may be injured if caught in the instrument.
• Do not spill samples or reagents into the instrument, or get any metals, such as staples or clips, inside
the instrument.
Doing so could cause a short-circuit and smoke emission.
• Do not touch any electrical circuitry inside the cover.
The risk of electrical shock is especially high when your hands are wet.
• The instrument must not be connected to a power outlet other than that specified on the rating plate.
Please note that the instrument must be grounded.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electrical shock.
• Avoid damage to the power cable. Do not place any heavy object on the cable or pull on it.
Doing so may cause fire or shock due to an electrical short or break in the wiring.
• In the unlikely event that the instrument emits an unusual odor or smoke, immediately turn off the main
switch and unplug the power cable, then contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Continued use of the instrument in such conditions could result in fire, electrical shock or personal injury.
Caution
• When handling a sample tube containing a sample, take care that the sample does not spill.
• Do not lean against the instrument.
The resulting impact could damage the instrument or cause it to tip over.
• For cleaning and maintenance that requires a cleaning agent, always use CyFlow CLEAN. If CyFlow
CLEAN is not used, the instrument will not be cleaned sufficiently and problems may result.
• If a sample with large particles or high viscosity such as coagulated blood is acquired, correct results
may not be obtained, or a fluid line may clog and cause instrument failure.
The cTUVus mark indicates that the equipment has been tested and certified to comply with the
electrical and fire safety regulations of the US and Canadian governments.
Those tests were conducted thoroughly by TÜV Rheinland, which is accredited as a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) of the United States, and by the Standards Council of Canada (SCC).
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
16/314
2.3 Installation
Warning
• Your authorized local Sysmex representative will unpack, install, and test the initial operation of the
instrument.
• This instrument must not be connected to a power outlet rated at anything other than that specified on
the rating plate. Please note that the instrument must be grounded.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electrical shock.
• Switch off the power supply before connecting any peripheral devices.
Failure to do so may result in electrical shock or damage to the instrument. In addition, an abnormal
stoppage may occur if a device is connected while the instrument is running.
Caution
• Install in a location where water will not splash or spray onto the instrument.
• Install in a location where the instrument will be protected from high temperature, humidity, dust and
direct sunlight.
• Do not install in a location subject to vibration.
• Do not subject the instrument to intense shock or vibration.
• Install the instrument in a well-ventilated area.
• Avoid installing the instrument near equipment that emits electrical interference, such as a radio or
centrifuge.
• Do not install the instrument near an area where chemicals are stored or gases are emitted.
• Do not use the instrument in a location where electroconductive gases, flammable gases, or anesthetics
that contain oxygen, hydrogen, or other flammable gases are present.
• Install the instrument indoors.
The instrument is intended for indoor use only.
• Place the reagent container at a level no more than 1 meter above or below the bottom of the analyzer.
Do not place reagents on top of the instrument.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
17/314
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
This instrument complies with the following IEC standards:
• IEC 61326-2-6:2005 (EN 61326-2-6:2006)
IEC 61326-2-6:2012 (EN 61326-2-6:2013)
Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use - EMC requirements
• EMI (Electromagnetic Interference). For this standard the requirements of class A are fulfilled.
• EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility). For this standard the minimum requirements with regards to susceptibility
are fulfilled.
• This equipment has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A Group 1. This means that this product is not
intended to generate and/or use radio-frequency energy in the form of electromagnetic radiation, inductive, and/or
capacitive coupling during operation. This also means that the product is suitable for use in all facilities except for the
following:
• Domestic facilities
• Facilities directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes
In a domestic environment it may cause radio interference, in which case you may need to take measures to
mitigate the interference. The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation (e.g. unshielded intentional
RF sources), as these may interfere with proper operation.
2.5 Avoiding infection
Risk of infection
• When performing any task with the instrument, such as analysis, maintenance, preparation, or post
processing, be sure to wear adequate personal protective equipment, such as protective gloves, a protective
mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Wash your hands with antiseptic solution after completing the task.
There is a risk of infection.
• Be sure to connect the instrument’s drain tubing to a waste fluid tank at the facility or other dedicated
waste container.
If connecting the tubing to a waste fluid tank at the facility, use a tank with a connector to which the drain
tubing can be attached, or a tank with other means of securing the tubing in place so as to avoid the risk
of waste fluid spillage. In addition, exercise care so as to avoid such spillage, for example by regularly
verifying that the tube remains properly secured in place.
• Never touch waste, or parts that have come into contact with waste, with your bare hands.
If you inadvertently come into contact with potentially infectious materials or surfaces, immediately rinse
the skin with large amounts of water, and then follow your laboratory's prescribed cleaning and
decontamination procedures.
• Use appropriate care when handling samples and quality control materials.
In the event that an infectious material gets in the eyes or an open wound, rinse with large amounts of
water and seek immediate medical attention.
• Exercise caution when handling waste fluid. If waste fluid comes into contact with your body or clothes,
wash thoroughly.
• Do not dispose of waste fluid while acquisition is in progress.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
18/314
2.6 Handling of reagents and quality control materials
For other cautionary points, see the following:
(➤P.35 "Chapter 5 Reagents")
2.7 Laser
2.8 Maintenance
Warning
• CyFlow SHEATH is an electrical conductor. If CyFlow SHEATH is spilled inadvertently near electrical
cables or appliances, there is a risk of electrical shock. Switch off the instrument, unplug the power cable,
and wipe off the CyFlow SHEATH.
• Do not clean the internal fluid lines of the instrument with a cleaning agent other than CyFlow CLEAN.
• CyFlow CLEAN is a strong alkali. Do not mix it with any acidic substances. Also, it should not come in
contact with skin or clothing. If contact occurs, rinse your skin or clothing with plenty of water to avoid
injury or damage.
• If CyFlow CLEAN comes into contact with the instrument's surface, it may corrode its finish. Immediately
wipe off with a damp cloth.
Caution
Follow the instructions on the reagent containers and boxes, package inserts, and safety data sheets.
Warning
The analyzer has a three-laser unit that is located inside the instrument. To avoid any risk of eye injury from
the laser, a protective cover is installed to prevent access by other than your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
Information
• When performing instrument inspection and maintenance, use the designated parts. Never use
substitute parts or perform modifications.
Doing so creates risk of instrument failure or damage.
• Use only the tools specifically authorized by Sysmex to perform maintenance.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
19/314
2.9 Disposal of materials
2.9.1 Waste disposal
Risk of infection
After becoming waste at the end-of-life, this instrument and its accessories are regarded as infectious.
They are therefore exempted from Directive 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and
may not be collected by public recycling authorities, to prevent possible risk of infection of personnel
working at those facilities.
Warning
• Do not dispose of the instrument, accessories, or consumables via public recycling.
• Incineration of contaminated parts is recommended.
• Please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative to receive further instructions for disposal.
Follow local legal requirements at all times.
Caution
Waste effluents from the instrument may contain dangerous substances, and any decisions regarding
disposal should be made only after consultation with local water authorities.
Waste end-of-life equipment should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. It should be
collected separately.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
20/314
2.9.2 Decontamination
2.10 Operators
Warning
Before decontaminating the instrument, be sure to turn off the power supply and unplug the power cord.
This is necessary to avoid the risk of electric shock. When cleaning the instrument, always wear adequate
personal protective equipment, such as protective gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab
coat. After decontamination, wash your hands carefully with antiseptic solution first and with soap
afterwards. Do not decontaminate the instrument's internal components. Internal decontamination should
only be executed by your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Information
• Decontamination of the instrument's outer surfaces should be performed in the following situations:
- Immediately after contamination with potentially infectious material
- In advance of repair or maintenance by your authorized local Sysmex representative
• Wear adequate personal protective equipment, such as protective gloves, a protective mask, protective
eyewear, and a lab coat.
• Wipe and clean contaminated surfaces with a common pH-neutral detergent solution until all visible
traces of contaminants, such as dried blood, are removed.
• Wipe the contaminated surfaces by using one of the following disinfectants* and allow adequate contact
time:
- Sodium hypochlorite (between 0.05 % and 0.5 %)
- 70 % ethanol or 70 % isopropyl alcohol
• Wipe the surfaces with a wet cloth dampened with distilled water to remove any remaining disinfectant
on the surfaces.
• Take care to prevent moisture from reaching the inside of the instrument.
• Take care to avoid applying any liquid close to or on the instrument’s touchscreen.
• As a final step, wipe the instrument with a dry disposable cloth.
*Make sure that you wet a cloth with the disinfectant before use. Do not apply the solutions directly to the
instrument surfaces. Doing so may cause damage to the surfaces or failure of the instrument. Although the
use of these solutions may cause some discoloration of the instrument coating, this does not affect the use,
safety, or performance of the instrument itself.
Caution
• The instrument must only be operated by properly trained personnel.
• If a malfunction of the instrument occurs, take only those measures specified in this manual. For further
assistance, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
21/314
2.11 Computer viruses
2.12 Use of other software
Warning
Although our software has already been checked for computer viruses, the configuration of a specific user
environment may make it prone to computer virus infections via the Internet or a network.
We recommend that our customers consider computer virus countermeasures that suit their computer
operating environment. Customers that use antivirus software in their operating environment should take
the following precautions.
1. Use the antivirus software to periodically check for viruses.
(1) Use antivirus software designed for your operating system.
(2) Disable the antivirus software during instrument software operation, as it may adversely affect
instrument operation.
(3) Disable functions that check file access.
(4) Disable firewalls and any other functions that protect or control data transfers.
2. Do not install any software other than the antivirus software.
3. USB memory sticks, CD-Rs and other external memory devices should be checked for viruses before
use.
4. Do not open files attached to emails or files of unknown origin without first performing a virus check.
5. Do not download files from the Internet or other sources that are not required for instrument operation.
However, the virus definition files used by the antivirus software are not subject to this restriction.
6. Always check for viruses before accessing files in a folder shared with other computers.
7. Check the effectiveness of computer virus countermeasures used on other computer systems in your
laboratory, and select the most effective for use on this instrument.
8. The customer assumes sole responsibility when connecting to an external network (for example, the
Internet).
Warning
• Do not install any software other than that preinstalled on the instrument. Do not run any other software
on the instrument. However, this restriction does not include the installation of antivirus software.
• Note that Sysmex will accept no liability whatsoever for any malfunctions arising from use of other
software.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
22/314
2.13 Cybersecurity
Warning
Please note the following points to ensure cybersecurity.
• Install the device in a locked and access-controlled area.
• For external connection terminals that will not be used, please consider installing physical protections.
• Properly manage account information such as user IDs and passwords, and conduct periodic reviews.
• Be careful not to share your user account information with another party.
• Do not use this device to browse Internet websites or use other online services, except as specified by
Sysmex.
• Use a dedicated line or VPN to connect to an external network, and do not connect directly to the
Internet.
• Do not connect the device to a wireless network unless authorized by Sysmex.
• Do not use the device for any purpose other than that for which it is intended.
• Do not make any changes to the settings that are not described in this manual.
• If you are using external media such as USB storage devices, please ensure that they are not infected
with a virus.
• If you notice any suspicious behavior that may indicate a virus, please contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
• Do not install any software on this device other than software approved by Sysmex.
• In case of problems with this device due to the use of unauthorized software, the product warranty will be
void.
Use the antivirus software to periodically check for viruses.
(1) Use antivirus software designed for your operation system to periodically check for viruses.
(2) Disable the antivirus software during instrument software operation as it may adversely affect
instrument operation.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
23/314
2.14 Safety labels on the instrument
Front and rear of analyzer
(1) Auto loader
(2) Sample tube holder
(3) Periphery of AC power inlet
(4) Waste fluid outlet connector
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
Warning
• Always unplug the power cable before servicing. There is a risk of electrical shock.
• Replace only with fuses of the specified type and current rating.
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
(2)
(3) (4)
Front of analyzer Rear of analyzer
(1)
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
24/314
Right interior
(1) Top of air pump unit
(2) Top of air pump unit
Caution, Hot
The surface of the air pump is hot. Do not touch. There is a risk of burn injury.
Warning
Always unplug the power cable before servicing. There is a risk of electrical shock.
(2)
(1)
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
25/314
Front (auto loader)
(1) Auto Loader (interior)
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
(1)
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
26/314
Front (sample tube holder)
(1) Sample tube holder (interior)
Waste container (optional)
(1) Waste container
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
Risk of infection
Treat all parts and surfaces of the instrument as posing a risk of infection.
(1)
(1)
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
27/314
2.15 Notice to the user
For a patient, user, or third party in the European Union, or in countries with an identical regulatory regime
(Regulation 2017/746/EU on In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices), if, during the use of this device or as a result of its
use, a serious incident occurs, please report it to the manufacturer or its authorized representative in the European
Union, and to your country's relevant authority.
Reports to the authorized representative in the European Union (Sysmex Europe SE) must be sent by email to:
vigilance@sysmex-europe.com, or by post to Sysmex Europe SE, Bornbarch 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany.
Chapter 2 Safety information
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
28/314
Chapter 3 Part names and functions
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
29/314
Chapter 3 Part names and functions
This chapter provides an overview and description of the parts of the instrument.
3.1 Analyzer
Front view
(1) Auto loader analysis status indicator LED
Indicates the status of auto loader analysis.
(2) Auto loader analysis start switch
Press to start auto loader analysis.
(3) Auto loader
Open to load rotor for auto loader analysis mode.
(4) Manual analysis status indicator LED
Indicates the status of manual analysis.
(5) Manual analysis start switch
Press to start manual analysis.
(6) Mode switch
Press to switch between auto loader analysis mode and manual analysis mode.
(7) Sample tube holder
Open to load single sample tubes.
Green light Ready for analysis
Blinking green Starting up/Analysis in progress/Maintenance in progress/Shutting down
Red light An "analysis not possible" error has occurred (without alarm)/Stopped
Blinking red An "analysis not possible" error has occurred (with alarm)
Not lit Powered off/A different analysis mode is selected
Green light Ready for analysis
Blinking green Starting up/Analysis in progress/Maintenance in progress/Shutting down
Red light An "analysis not possible" error has occurred (without alarm)/Stopped
Blinking red An "analysis not possible" error has occurred (with alarm)
Not lit Powered off/A different analysis mode is selected
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Chapter 3 Part names and functions
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
30/314
Right view
(1) Right cover
Opens to allow replacement of the air pump.
(2) Vent
Discharges heat from inside the instrument.
Right interior
(1) Air pump unit
Adjusts the air pressure that is supplied inside the instrument.
(1)
(2)
(1)
Chapter 3 Part names and functions
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
31/314
Rear view
(1) Main power switch
Turns the main power of the instrument ON/OFF.
(2) AC power inlet
Supplies power using the Sysmex-specified power cable.
(3) Fuse holder
Holds a 250 V, 10 A fuse (time lag).
(4) USB cable for IPU connection (USB 3.0)
Used for data acquisition. Connect to the USB 3.0 dedicated port on the IPU.
(5) SI-10 connection port
Connects to the SI-10 (optional).
(6) Port for an optional waste-container-full sensor
Connect the waste-container-full sensor to this port when the drain tubing is connected to the waste container.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.34 "4.3 Options")
(➤P.268 "17.3 Replacing the waste container")
(7) USB cables for IPU connection (USB 2.0)
Used for analyzer control. Connects to the USB 2.0 dedicated port on the IPU.
(8) Auxiliary port
This port is not used.
Caution
• This is a dedicated USB cable for use only with the IPU. Do not connect to a computer or any other device .
There is a risk of instrument malfunction and failure.
• Do not use a USB extension cable. There is a risk of lowered communication quality and instrument stoppage.
Caution
• This is a dedicated USB cable for use only with the IPU. Do not connect to a computer or any other device .
There is a risk of instrument malfunction and failure.
• Do not use a USB extension cable. There is a risk of lowered communication quality and instrument stoppage.
(1)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(3) (4) (7) (8) (9) (10)
Chapter 3 Part names and functions
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
32/314
(9) Sheath reagent aspiration connector
CyFlow SHEATH is aspirated through this connector.
(10) Waste fluid outlet connector
Discharges waste fluid. Connect to a waste container or a waste fluid tank at the facility using the provided drain
tubing.
3.2 IPU (Information Processing Unit)
IPU
The operation of the IPU is based on Microsoft Windows. For information on how to use Microsoft Windows, see
the manual included with the operating system.
(1) Monitor
(2) Keyboard
(3) Mouse
(4) Main unit
Caution
The IPU is a PC that is designed only for use with the instrument. It cannot be used as a general-purpose PC.
Information
The above diagram is for reference only. Refer to the computer's manual for the location of connection ports and
other information.
For details, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Chapter 4 Consumables, supply parts, and options
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
33/314
Chapter 4 Consumables, supply parts, and options
This chapter describes consumables, supply parts, and options.
4.1 Consumables
The following consumables can be additionally purchased.
4.2 Supply parts
The following items are delivered with this instrument. Some items may not be available for additional purchase, or
the order unit quantity may differ from the quantity delivered with this instrument.
For details, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Caution
Use only Sysmex-specified consumables, supply parts, and options.
If it is necessary to use consumables, supply parts, or options other than those described here, please contact
your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Product code Item name Sales unit
26677681 Fuse 50T100H 10
05104711 Air pump set No. 1 1
Product code Item name Quantity
CX036773 CDR_ASSY NO. 486 1
CQ710976 INTAKE TUBE_ASSY NO. 104 (reagent spout set) 1
CD620558 XF-1600 (IVD) IFU (EN-EU) 1
CV470813 MEDIA NO. 3 (device driver for barcode reader) 1
26677681 FUSE 50T100H 2
46231221 CAP OPENER NO. 2 (Used to open CyFlow SHEATH) 1
26652513 TIE WRAP PLT-1M 10
44253405 TUBE POLYURETHANE 6MMIDX9MMOD 1
Chapter 4 Consumables, supply parts, and options
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
34/314
4.3 Options
The following items can be ordered as optional items to be used with this instrument.
For details, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Item name Description
Fixed rotor 24-position fixed rotor that can be loaded on the auto loader
Sysmex-Rotor 12 places 12-position swing-out rotor that can be loaded on the auto loader
Sysmex-Rotor 24 places 24-position swing-out rotor that can be loaded on the auto loader
Rotor barcode kit Barcode labels for rotors
Waste container Used with the waste container full sensor.
Waste container full sensor Used with the waste container.
Graphic printer Prints reports and lists of analysis information and results.
Handheld barcode reader Reads barcodes on the outer box of CyFlow SHEATH, the assay sheet
of CyFlow DailyQC, or sample tubes.
External indicator light (SI-10) Enables you to see the current instrument status, even from a
distance.
Chapter 5 Reagents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
35/314
Chapter 5 Reagents
This chapter describes the reagents that are used with the instrument.
5.1 General information
Before use, be sure to read the information on the reagent containers and boxes, reagent instructions, safety data
sheets, and this manual.
Always observe the cautions and instructions for each reagent.
5.2 Reagent list
The sheath fluid, cleaning agent, and quality control material used with this instrument are as follows.
Follow the instructions for use and safety measures provided for each reagent to ensure correct and proper use.
• Sheath fluid: CyFlow SHEATH
• Cleaning agent: CyFlow CLEAN
• Quality control material: CyFlow DailyQC
• Quality control material: CyFlow GainSet (optional)
Chapter 5 Reagents
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
36/314
Chapter 6 Installation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
37/314
Chapter 6 Installation
This chapter provides information regarding installation of the instrument.
6.1 Preparing for installation
The instrument is installed or moved by your authorized local Sysmex representative. The following is a list of things
to do to prepare for the installation or move.
• Ensure that there is sufficient space for installation, with safety in mind.
For the required installation space, see the following:
(➤P.38 "6.2.4 Installation space")
• Note the weight of this instrument. Make sure that the floor and any equipment on which the instrument is to be
installed can withstand the weight.
• Once this instrument is delivered, check the condition of its packaging immediately.
• Store the packaged instrument upright and in a dry place until it is time for installation.
6.2 Installation
6.2.1 Cautions on installation
The instrument and associated equipment are installed by your authorized local Sysmex representative. In case
relocation becomes necessary after installation, contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Problems resulting from moving of the instrument by anyone other than your authorized local Sysmex
representative are not covered by the warranty, even within the warranty period.
6.2.2 Grounding
The power cable of the instrument and any peripheral devices must be connected to a properly grounded power outlet.
An appropriate adaptor plug and Sysmex-specified power cables should be used according to your region.
For details, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Information
If the packaging has been damaged in any way, immediately contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
Warning
• Be sure to ground this instrument. Improper grounding may cause electrical shock.
• Never exceed socket capacity. Failure to do so may cause a fire.
Chapter 6 Installation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
38/314
6.2.3 Installation environment
For the operating environment (ambient temperature, relative humidity, and air pressure), see the following:
(➤P.39 "Chapter 7: 7.1.1 Physical specifications")
For other conditions, see the following:
(➤P.16 "Chapter 2: 2.3 Installation")
6.2.4 Installation space
Install the instrument with a clearance of at least 30 cm at the back and right side.
If the IPU will be installed on the right side of the instrument, take care not to block the vent.
Caution
Use the Sysmex-specified power cables. Do not use the Sysmex-specified power cables for any equipment
other than this instrument.
Information
If the environment does not meet the ambient temperature and humidity requirements, control the
environment with air conditioning.
Component Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg)
Analyzer Approx. 700 Approx. 630 Approx. 740 Approx. 97
Approx. 890 (with the
auto loader ejected)
Approx.
740
Approx.
630
Approx.
260
Approx.
700
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
39/314
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
This chapter describes specifications, principles, and other technical information.
7.1 Specifications
7.1.1 Physical specifications
Item Specification
Dimensions and weight 700 (W) x 630 (D) x 740 (H) mm, 97 kg
The dimensions (width, depth, height) and weight have an acceptable range of ±5
% for dimensions and ±10 % for weight, respectively.
Electrical ratings Voltage: AC 100 V to 240 V
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 350 VA or less
Protection type: Class I
Operating environment Ambient temperature: 18 °C to 28 °C
Relative humidity: 20 % to 85 %
Air pressure: 80 kPa to 106 kPa
Pollution degree: 2
Noise level 60 dB or less
(75 dB or less for rinse cup discharge and alarm sounds)
Storage conditions Ambient temperature: -10 °C to 60 °C
Relative humidity: 10 % to 95 % (no condensation)
Air pressure: 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Laser Class I (IEC 60825-1:2007, IEC 60825-1:2014)
Safety standards IEC 61010-1:2010+A1, IEC 61010-2-081:2019, IEC 61010-2-101:2018
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
40/314
7.1.2 Performance
* Refers to the coefficient of variation when the measurement is repeated at least 10 times, using the following
samples and the measurement conditions (panels).
- For FSC/SSC and fluorescence sensitivity: CyFlow DailyQC by applying the panel [QC panel]
- For WBC events: Commercially available stabilized blood materials prepared at WBC 300-600/μL which are
qualified for use on the XF-1600, by applying the panel [WRP_R panel]
** Refers to the coefficient of variation when the measurement is repeated for 20 days by conducting 2 runs with
2 replicates each day in accordance with CLSI EP05-A3.
- For FSC/SSC and fluorescence sensitivity: CyFlow DailyQC by applying the panel [QC panel]
- For WBC events: Commercially available stabilized blood materials prepared at WBC 300-600/μL which are
qualified for use on the XF-1600, by applying the panel [WRP_R panel]
Item Specification
Acquisition rate 50,000 events/second
Minimum detectable particle size FSC: 0.5 μm, SSC: 0.5 μm
Fluorescence sensitivity FITC < 100 MESF
PE < 50 MESF
APC < 100 MESF
Fluorescence linearity FL1 R2 ≥0.97
FL2 R2 ≥0.97
FL6 R2 ≥0.97
Repeatability* FSC and SSC sensitivity CV (%) ≤10 %
Fluorescence sensitivity CV (%) ≤10 %
WBC events CV (%) ≤10 %
Intermediate precision** FSC and SSC sensitivity CV (%) ≤10 %
Fluorescence sensitivity CV (%) ≤10 %
WBC events CV (%) ≤10 %
Carryover <0.1 %
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
41/314
7.1.3 Optics
The semiconductor laser light (488 nm, 638 nm, and 405 nm) interrogates the cells and particles passing
through the flow cell. The forward scattered light is detected by a photodiode, and the side-scattered light and
fluorescence are detected by a photomultiplier. The light signals received by each detector are converted into
electrical signals, and by analyzing these signals, cell and particle information can be obtained.
Channel Laser wavelength Fluorochromes or FSC/SSC Optical filters
FSC 488 nm Forward scatter -
SSC Side scatter -
FL1 FITC 530/30
FL2 PE 580/30
FL3 PE-DyLight 594 610/14
FL4 PerCP-Cy5.5 700/50
FL5 PE-Cy7 750LP
FL6 638 nm APC 660/20
FL7 Alexa Fluor 700 720/40
FL8 APC-Cy7 780/60
FL9 405 nm Pacific Blue 450/50
FL10 Pacific Orange 540/80
Laser Diode (488 nm)
Flow cell
FL6 FL7
FL2 FL1
FL4 FL3
FL9
FL10
Laser Diode (638 nm) Laser Diode (405 nm)
FL8
Forward Scatter (FSC)
Side Scatter (SSC)
FL5
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
42/314
7.1.4 Fluidics
7.1.5 Software specifications
Data storage capacity and output format.
Item Specification
Flow rates Low: 5 μL/min
Middle: 30 μL/min or 60 μL/min
High: 90 μL/min or 120 μL/min
Item Specification
QC files 40 files for cytometer QC
(500 data points for each QC item)
50 files for panel QC
(200 QC items per file, 200 data points for each QC item)
Data output format Flow Cytometry Standard (FCS) 3.0
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
43/314
7.2 Supported sample tubes
⏺ Regular sample tubes
⏺ Micro collection tubes
Standard micro collection tube shapes are shown below.
Compatible dimensions vary depending on the shape of the micro collection tube. The following are only
guidelines. It will be necessary to check using the actual micro collection tube used.
The cap is not included in the dimensions. Open the cap during analysis.
Item Specification
Diameter (a) 12 mm ± 0.2 mm or 13 mm ± 0.2 mm
Length (b) 75 mm ± 5 mm
Information
In manual analysis mode, sample tubes with high transparency may not be detected. Please verify that the
sample tubes can be used in manual analysis mode before measurement.
Note:
For information on using sample tubes not described here, please contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
b
a
Diameter 13 mm or Diameter 13 mm or less less Diameter 13 mm or less
Diameter 7.4 mm to 7.8 mm Diameter 9.8 mm to 10.8 mm Diameter 10.0 mm to 11.0 mm
20 mm
35 mm or more
36 mm to 50 mm
28 mm to 48 mm
36 mm to 46 mm
27 mm or more
8.5 mm
20 mm
Diameter 8 mm or less
35 mm or more Type A
Type B
Type C
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
44/314
7.2.1 Acceptable barcodes for sample tubes
The types of barcodes that can be used and check digit support are listed below.
Caution
Use a check digit whenever possible when reading barcodes on sample tubes. There is a risk of incorrect
reading of the barcode if a check digit is not used.
Barcode types Check digits Number of digits
ITF None Max. 22 digits (sample No.)
Modulus 10 Max. 21 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 22 digits
CODABAR/NW7 None Max. 22 digits (sample No.)
Modulus 11 Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
Weighted
modulus 11
Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
Modulus 16 Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
CODE39 None Max. 22 digits (sample No.)
Modulus 43 Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
JAN/EAN/UPC Modulus 10 12 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = 13 digits
ISBT128 Modulus 103 Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
CODE128 Modulus 103 Max. 22 digits (sample No.) + 1 digit (check digit) = Max. 23 digits
Information
When using CODE128, do not use the following codes.
Note:
In CODE128, any one of the characters "A", "B", "C", "a", "b" or "c" can be used for the start/stop code.
Code CODE A CODE B
95 US DEL
96 FNC 3 FNC 3
97 FNC 2 FNC 2
98 SHIFT SHIFT
99 CODE C CODE C
100 CODE B FNC 4
Code CODE A CODE B
101 FNC 4 CODE A
102 FNC 1 FNC 1
103 START (CODE A)
104 START (CODE B)
105 START (CODE C)
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
45/314
Barcode element dimensions
Narrow element ≥ 190 μm
Wide element ≤ 1.2 mm
Narrow element ≤ Gap between characters ≤ Wide element
Narrow/Wide ratio
Internal requirements pertaining to a single character are as follows:
Narrow (MAX): Wide (MIN) = 1:2.2 or more
Narrow (MIN): Narrow (MAX) = 1:1.3 or less
Wide (MIN): Wide (MAX) = 1:1.4 or less
PCS value (Print Contrast Signal)
The measurement method is compliant with JIS × 0501 5.3 Optical Characteristics of Barcode Symbols
Specification: PCS value ≥ 0.45
Barcode label print quality
Use barcode labels of Label Grade "C" or higher as defined in the ANSI standards.
Laminated labels may not be readable.
Uneven printing
One bar of a barcode appears as shown on the left
when viewed under a microscope.
Expressing the irregularity in the width of one bar as
shown below, it is necessary that S ≤ 20 %.
PCS =
Reflectance of white - Reflectance of black
Reflectance of white
S =
MAX - MIN
× 100 %
MAX
MAX
MIN
Bar
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
46/314
7.3 Supported rotors
⏺ Fixed rotor
Accommodates up to 24 uncapped tubes
⏺ Swing-out rotors
• Accommodates up to 12 uncapped tubes
• Accommodates up to 24 uncapped tubes
Information
The XF-1600 can be used with the Sample Preparation System PS-10, which automates the process of
cell preparation for transfer to a flow cytometer, using the above rotors.
For appropriate use of the product, refer to the instructions for use of the PS-10.
To connect the XF-1600 to the PS-10, see the following:
(➤P.252 "Chapter 15: 15.4.16 PS-10")
For more details, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
47/314
7.3.1 Barcode labels for rotors
⏺ Meaning of numbers on barcode labels
(1) Rotor type
The rotor type is indicated by prefix numbers from 01 to 03. Ensure that the barcode label prefix
matches the type of rotor used.
03: Fixed rotors (24)
02: Swing-out rotors (24)
01: Swing-out rotors (12)
(2) Unique ID
Each rotor type has a barcode label bearing a number from 00 to 14.
⏺ Location of barcode labels
Apply the labels on the place indicated below for each rotor type so that they can be properly scanned by the
instrument.
Information
Make sure that you use the barcode label included with the rotor.
Fixed rotor (24) Swing-out rotor (12) Swing-out rotor (24)
(1) (2)
Chapter 7 Instrument specifications
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
48/314
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
49/314
Chapter 8 Basic operation
8.1 Overall operation workflow
The chart below shows the operation sequence of the instrument. The typical workflow is shown in gray.
Shutdown ➤P.53
• Log off/on as a different user
➤P.56
Startup ➤P.50
Self-test (approx. 10 minutes)
Chapter 12 Run samples ➤P.163
Has analysis ended
for the day?
No
Yes
Have you
used the instrument
continuously for 24 hours
or more?
Yes
Chapter 10 Register panel/subset panel and work
item ➤P.89
Chapter 14 Create reports ➤P.209
Chapter 13 Analyze data ➤P.177
No
Chapter 9 Perform QC ➤P.63
Chapter 11 Panel QC ➤P.131
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
50/314
8.2 Startup
8.2.1 Inspection prior to turning the power on
⏺ Instrument inspection
• Check the tube and cable connections.
• Check if there are any kinked tubes.
• Check if there are any objects on the instrument.
• If connected to a network, make sure that the network devices (hubs and network converters) are all powered
on.
• Discard any waste fluid in the waste container.
For the procedure for discarding waste fluid, see the following:
(➤P.268 "Chapter 17: 17.3 Replacing the waste container")
⏺ Reagent inspection
Make sure that there are sufficient amounts of reagents for the number of samples to be processed that day.
If a reagent runs out during acquisition, the instrument will automatically stop. Replace the reagent. Acquisition
cannot be resumed until the reagent is replaced.
The following table describes the amount of reagents required for startup, shutdown, and cleaning.
Note that the following values are for reference only. Depending on the circumstances of use, the values may
vary.
Instrument operation CyFlow SHEATH CyFlow CLEAN
Startup
(including 1 background check)
Approx. 160 mL -
Shutdown Approx. 80 mL Approx. 2.5 mL
Cleaning
(➤P.273 "17.6 Cleaning")
Approx. 170 mL Approx. 2.5 mL
Information
The reagent volumes required for running samples depend on the measurement conditions.
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
51/314
8.2.2 Turning the power on
1 Verify that the main power switch of each device is on.
The analyzer power is controlled by the IPU, so the main power switch can be kept in the "ON" position at all
times. Check the main power of the following devices:
• Analyzer (➤P.29 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Analyzer")
• Monitor
• Printer (optional)
2 Turn the IPU power on.
The instrument power turns on and the analyzer runs a self-test. (➤P.52 "8.2.3 Executing an analyzer selftest")
The [IPU Logon] dialog box appears.
3 Enter the [Logon Name] and [Password].
A dialog box prompting you to change your password appears when you log on for the first time. Please follow
the instructions to change your password.
4 Click [OK].
The main screen appears in the environment of the logged-on user.
For information about the main screen, see the following:
(➤P.57 "8.6 Main screen")
Note:
If an error occurs during startup (for example, [Tube remains in tube holder]), you must log on to the IPU to
clear the error.
Information
The software is installed with a default logon name [admin] with the password "admin".
The [admin] should be the first user to log in to the software and set up additional user accounts. For
details, see the following:
(➤P.241 "Chapter 15: 15.4.6 User administration")
[IPU Logon] dialog box
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
52/314
8.2.3 Executing an analyzer self-test
When the instrument power turns on, a self-test is automatically executed to check if there are any problems
with the analyzer. The self-test takes about 10 minutes. The self-test consists of the following tasks:
⏺ Initializing mechanical parts
The mechanical parts move to their initial positions, and the hydraulic parts are initialized and checked.
⏺ Rinsing hydraulic parts
Rinsing is performed 1 to 2 times, depending on how much time has elapsed since the previous rinsing.
⏺ Background check
A background check is performed without sample aspiration to check the effectiveness of rinsing. This is
repeated up to 3 times.
It is performed using measurement conditions for the background check. If the result (event count) does not
drop below the allowable value* after 3 runs, a [Background check error] occurs. For details, see the following:
(➤P.295 "Chapter 18 Troubleshooting")
* The factory setting for the allowable count value is 1,000.
Information
Do not restart or log off from Windows while the main power of the connected devices is ON. The devices
and IPU may fail to reconnect. If you restarted or logged off from Windows, shut down Windows, turn off
the main power of each device, and then repeat the procedure from step 1.
Caution
Even if the results are not below the allowable value, you can end the check by clicking [Close] in the [Help]
dialog box. However, there is a risk that correct results may not be obtained.
Note that clicking [Close] does not clear the error.
Note:
To cancel logon and exit the IPU program, click [Abort]. You cannot exit the IPU program when the
instrument is in operation.
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
53/314
8.3 Shutdown
Shutdown consists of rinsing the hydraulic system with CyFlow CLEAN and turning the instrument power off.
When you finish analysis work for the day, always perform a shutdown. If sample acquisition and analysis work will
continue for more than one day, perform a shutdown once per day.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is set to [Manual]. If the
mode is set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
2 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the analysis status LED/instrument status shown in the
bottom left corner of the IPU screen is not green, wait until it
turns green.
3 Click [Maintenance] in the screen transition area.
The submenu on the right appears.
Analysis status
indicator LED
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
54/314
4 Click [Shutdown].
The dialog box on the right appears.
5 Dispense CyFlow CLEAN into a sample tube.
The amount of CyFlow CLEAN required for the shutdown is about 2.5 mL. Make sure that CyFlow CLEAN has
not expired.
6 Place CyFlow CLEAN in the sample tube holder.
Place it in the front holder as shown on the right.
Make sure that the tube is uncapped.
Warning
CyFlow CLEAN is a strong alkali. Do not mix it with any acidic substances.
Caution
• When handling CyFlow CLEAN, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such as protective
gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat.
• Make sure that the fluid does not spill.
[Shutdown] dialog box
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
55/314
7 Press the manual analysis start switch on the analyzer.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer
and aspiration begins.
Rinsing takes about 10 minutes.
When the aspiration finishes, the sample tube
holder is automatically ejected.
8 Remove the tube.
When rinsing finishes, the sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer.
The progress dialog box closes and the instrument’s LED turns red.
9 Shutdown the IPU manually.
1 Click [Exit IPU] in the screen transition area.
A dialog box appears prompting you to exit the IPU application.
2 Click [Yes].
The IPU shuts down and the instrument power turns off.
Information
You cannot use (Start) in the status area to start aspiration. If you click (Start), a warning alarm
sounds.
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
56/314
8.4 Logging off from the IPU
To change the logged-on user, follow the steps below to log off.
1 Click [Log Off] in the screen transition area.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The current user is logged off from the IPU.
After the current user is logged off, the [IPU Logon] dialog box appears. (➤P.51 "8.2.2 Turning the power on")
8.5 Using screen lock
When an operator needs to step away from the instrument, the IPU can be locked.
The screen is locked once the instrument has not been operated for a certain amount of time. However, if a dialog or
control menu appears, the screen lock function will not operate.
The following dialog box appears while the screen is locked. To unlock the screen, enter the password.
Note:
Logoff cannot be executed while the analyzer is running.
Note:
The time interval after which the screen is locked can be set between 15 and 60 minutes. For details, see
the following:
(➤P.250 "Chapter 15: 15.4.14 Security settings")
[Logon Name] Displays the currently logged-on user.
[Password] Enter the password to unlock the screen.
[OK] Click after entering the password to unlock the screen.
[Log on as a different user] Click to log the current user out so that another user can log on.
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
57/314
8.6 Main screen
This section explains the main screen that is displayed when you click [Main] in the screen transition area.
The main screen of the IPU consists of the areas described below.
For display settings, see the following:
(➤P.240 "Chapter 15: 15.4.4 Display")
Screen transition area These buttons are used to move from the main screen to display the following
menus or dialog boxes:
- [Cytometer QC], [Panel QC & Setup]
- [IPU Setting], [Analyzer Setting], [Version Information]
- [Maintenance]
- [History]
- [Log Off]
- [Exit IPU]
(➤P.58 "8.6.1 Screen transition area")
Worklist area Displays a list of consolidated data for integrated management of information
about samples to be measured, their measurement conditions, and the
measurement results.
(➤P.89 "Chapter 10: 10.1 Worklist area")
Measurement condition
setting area
You can set measurement conditions of an active workitem or subset panel.
(➤P.163 "Chapter 12: 12.2 Setting measurement conditions")
Analysis area Displays plots and reports with the tools for data analysis.
Status area Indicates the status of the instrument and provides feedback on the system
using indicator icons. It also contains additional controls and information
related to acquisition. The workitem/panel and user account information is
also displayed.
(➤P.59 "8.6.2 Status area")
Main screen (when set to [Single display])
Status area
Screen transition area
Analysis
area
Worklist area
Measurement
condition
setting area
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
58/314
8.6.1 Screen transition area
The screen transition area consists of the items described below.
[Main] Click to return to the main screen.
[QC] Click to display the submenu for QC.
[Setting] Click to display the submenu for user settings and version information.
[Maintenance] Click to display the submenu for user maintenance.
[History] Click to display the area for checking log entries.
[Log Off] Click to change the logged-on user.
[Exit IPU] Click to shut down the IPU. If the instrument is powered on, this will also turn
off the instrument power by skipping the shutdown procedure that includes
rinsing of the hydraulic system. When you click the button, a confirmation
dialog box appears.
Caution
• If you need to shut down the instrument by clicking [Exit IPU], verify that the sample tube holder has been
retracted before clicking [Exit IPU]. If not, press the mode switch.
• Never push the sample tube holder with your hands, as doing so may damage the instrument. To close
the sample tube holder, always use the mode switch.
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
59/314
8.6.2 Status area
The status area consists of the items described below.
Instrument status indicator Indicates the status of the analyzer.
The meanings of the indicated colors are the same as the manual analysis
status LED on the front of the analyzer.
(➤P.29 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Analyzer")
Analyzer name Displays the instrument nickname. [XF-1600] is displayed by default.
For details on the instrument nickname setting, see the following:
(➤P.255 "Chapter 15: 15.5.3 Instrument")
Account information Displays the user name of the logged-on user and an icon that indicates the
user’s role. The icon colors have the following meanings:
Gray: [Administrator]
Blue: [Supervisor]
Green: [AssayDeveloper]
Yellow: [Operator]
CyFlow SHEATH
status
Displays the status of the reagent connected to the instrument. The indicated
colors have the following meanings:
White: Sufficient reagent remains
Orange: Insufficient reagent remains
Waste container
status
Displays the status of the waste container connected to the instrument.
White: Sufficient free space remains in the waste container
Orange: Insufficient free space remains in the waste container
Analysis mode and tube
position
Varies depending on the analysis mode.
[Manual]: Manual analysis mode
[AutoLoader]: Auto loader analysis mode
Current tube position (e.g. [Pos1]) is displayed under [AutoLoader] when the
run is executed with auto loader analysis mode.
Measurement control button These buttons control measurement of the sample.
(Start)/ (Start) Click the button to start running the samples.
The button is disabled during acquisition and the color changes to gray.
is for manual analysis mode and is for auto loader analysis mode.
(Stop)/ (Stop) This button is enabled only when acquisition is in progress. When enabled,
the color changes to blue. Click the button to stop the acquisition process for
that sample. The data acquired up to this point is saved, and the workitem
[Status] column displays [Measured].
is for manual analysis mode and is for auto loader analysis mode.
Instrument status
indicator
Waste container PS-10 status
status
Analyzer name/ CyFlow SHEATH status
account information Analysis mode and tube position
Measurement control button
Measurement status and
sample information
Information bar
Help button
Printer status
Host connection status
Progress bar
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
60/314
(Abort)/ (Abort) This button is enabled only when acquisition is in progress. When enabled,
the color changes to blue. Click the button to abort the acquisition. The
workitem [Status] column remains [Unmeasured]. The data collected up to
this point is deleted.
is for manual analysis mode and is for auto loader analysis mode.
Progress bar Indicates the startup progress.
Information bar Displays error messages or the startup progress.
Measurement status and
sample information
Displays the measurement information of the sample being acquired.
Displays the number of events acquired at the current time.
To see the number of events acquired when the stop condition is met, check
the plots in the workarea.
Displays the number of events acquired per second.
Displays the time elapsed since starting acquisition.
[Panel] Displays the panel name of the sample being acquired.
[Subset Panel] Displays the subset panel name of the sample being acquired.
[Primary ID] Displays the primary ID of the sample being acquired.
[Secondary ID] Displays the secondary ID of the sample being acquired.
Help button This appears when there is an error.
Click to display the [Help] dialog box.
PS-10 status Displays the status of the connection to the Sysmex Sample Preparation
System PS-10. The indicated colors have the following meanings:
Green: Connected
Red: Not connected
For details on how to connect to the PS-10, see the following:
(➤P.252 "Chapter 15: 15.4.16 PS-10")
Printer status Displays the status of the printer. The indicated colors have the following
meanings:
Green: Ready
Red: Not ready
For details on how to connect to the printer, see the following:
(➤P.253 "Chapter 15: 15.4.17 Printer")
Host computer status Displays the status of the connection to the host computer. The indicated
colors have the following meanings:
Green: Connected
Red: Not connected
For details on how to connect to the host computer, see the following:
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
61/314
8.7 List of access privileges for each user authority
You can perform the following actions based on the assigned user authority.
✔: Available
-: Not available
*: Panel Master tab is not displayed
**: Functions available for QC file - registration, editing, deletion, backup, and restore
Functions available for QC charts - registration, editing, managing, vial line, backup, and restore
***: Available only for some of the functions. For details on available functions, refer to the relevant chapters.
Category Action
[User Authority]
[Administrator]
[Supervisor]
[AssayDeveloper]
[Operator]
Startup/Shutdown ✔ ✔
Worklist Create/edit/delete workitems ✔ ✔
Display/edit patient information ✔ ✔
Validate workitems ✔ -
Export data to host computer ✔ ✔
Measurement condition
setting
Configure/edit conditions ✔ -
Acquisition/running
samples
✔ ✔
Status area Display status area ✔ ✔
Analysis Display, move, and zoom gates ✔ ✔
User setting Access to IPU and Analyzer settings For details, see the following:
➤P.232 "Chapter 15: 15.2 Settings
available for each user authority"
Panel setting Create/edit panels ✔ -*
Run samples for panel creation/edit ✔ -*
User maintenance ✔ ✔
Reporting Printing/exporting report ✔ ✔
QC (both cytometer QC
and Panel QC)
Entering/deleting lot information, editing
QC plots ✔ -*
Run daily QC ✔ ✔
Run baseline setup ✔ -
Connecting to PS-10 ✔ ✔
History ✔ ✔
Data analysis tools [XF-1600 File] tab (Export, Print, Backup) ✔ ✔
[XF-1600 File] tab (Restore) ✔ -
[Home] tab (creating/editing gates, adding
plots, choosing a parent gate)
✔ -
[View] tab (change scaling) ✔ -
[Compensation] tab (Compensation) ✔ -
[Statistics] tab ✔ -***
Troubleshooting ✔ ✔
Chapter 8 Basic operation
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
62/314
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
63/314
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
9.1 Overall cytometer QC workflow
The flowchart below shows the sequence of cytometer QC procedures. The typical workflow is shown in gray.
Perform cytometer QC
Has the QC
bead lot been
registered?
Yes
No
Register lot information ➤P.69
Is the baseline
setup complete?
Checked daily
QC results?
Perform daily QC ➤P.74
Perform baseline setup ➤P.71
Check daily QC results ➤P.78
Yes
Yes
No
No
Cytometer QC is complete Next step Panel QC ➤P.131
Prepare QC beads ➤P.64
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
64/314
9.2 Overview of cytometer QC
Quality Control (QC) is a set of procedures to monitor the daily performance of the cytometer using CyFlow DailyQC
to ensure that the cytometer is working accurately and precisely.
The process involves:
• Automated baseline setup
• Daily QC
You first establish the cytometer's baseline by running CyFlow DailyQC, then run the same lot to perform daily QC.
The system monitors changes in the %rCV (percent robust coefficient of variation), the PMT (photomultiplier tube)
voltages, and laser values of daily QC results.
If a significant change in performance is indicated, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
9.3 Overview of baseline setup
The baseline setup workflow uses CyFlow DailyQC to define the cytometer's initial baseline status.
In this process, the %rCV for all detectors and the median SSC/fluorescence intensity are automatically measured.
The software algorithms use the information to determine cytometer settings and provide target values of %rCV for all
detectors as well as PMT voltages and laser values for SSC and all fluorescence detectors.
9.3.1 When baseline setup is performed
The following are guidelines for when baseline setup should be performed:
• No baseline has been previously set up
• When using a new QC bead lot for which the baseline has not yet been set up
• Daily QC has failed
For details, see the following:
(➤P.77 "9.9 Performing daily QC", step 9)
• After major troubleshooting or servicing of the instrument
Information
Make sure that CyFlow DailyQC is used for both baseline setup and daily QC. If not used, proper baseline
setup/QC cannot be guaranteed.
Note:
Values of PMT voltages and laser values are used as reference.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
65/314
9.4 Overview of daily QC
After the baseline is set up, the same lot of CyFlow DailyQC is used to run the daily QC to check for variations from
those baseline measurements to monitor the daily performance of the cytometer.
In this process, the software measures and records the %rCV (for all detectors), the PMT voltages (for SSC and all
fluorescence detectors), and laser values (for all fluorescence units).
The results can also be viewed as radar charts and L-J charts.
9.4.1 Type of quality control
The L-J control is applied by the software to automatically track the cytometer setup values over time, monitor
performance, and detect shifts or trends in parameters as they occur.
9.4.2 When daily QC is performed
The following are guidelines for when daily QC should be performed:
• Daily before sample measurement
• After major troubleshooting or servicing of the instrument
• When you have concerns about the accuracy of the instrument's performance
9.5 QC files
For monitoring the instrument's performance, a [QC File] is created for each QC bead lot and contains the following
information:
• Material name
• Lot number
• Expiration date
• Target/Limit information
• Baseline and daily QC results
Note:
If the baseline for the lot has not been determined, perform baseline setup before proceeding.
Note:
Up to 40 QC files can be saved, and a maximum of 500 data points can be recorded for each QC item in
each QC file.
After 500 data points are reached, each new data point automatically deletes the oldest data point.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
66/314
9.6 QC screen
After clicking [QC] - [Cytometer QC] in the screen transition area, the worklist and measurement condition setting
areas in the main screen are changed to the QC screen below.
9.6.1 QC file list area
The QC file list area displays a list of QC files.
QC screen
QC file list area
QC charts area
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
67/314
⏺ QC File
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
(Daily QC) Click this button to perform daily QC.
The button is disabled when the baseline is not set up for the selected QC file.
(➤P.74 "9.9 Performing daily QC")
(Baseline)* Click this button to perform baseline setup.
(➤P.71 "9.8 Performing baseline setup")
(Registration)* Click this button to register a QC file.
(➤P.69 "9.7 Registering lot information")
(Edit QC File)* Click this button to edit the selected QC file.
(➤P.84 "9.11 Managing QC files")
(Delete)* Click this button to delete the selected QC file.
(➤P.84 "9.11 Managing QC files")
(Backup)* Click this button to open a dialog box that allows you to export a selected QC file to
an external file.
This button is disabled if no QC file is selected.
(Restore)* Click this button to open a dialog box that allows you to restore a saved QC file.
[Index] Displays the QC file number that is automatically assigned by increments of one when
registered.
[Material] Displays the material name. Only [CyFlow DailyQC] is available.
[Lot No.] Displays the bead lot number.
[Daily QC] Displays the last daily QC result of the QC file. Either [Pass] or [Fail] is shown after
daily QC.
[Last Baseline Date] Displays the latest measured date and time of baseline.
[Last Daily QC Date] Displays the latest measured date and time of daily QC.
[Exp. Date] Displays the expiration date of the bead lot.
[Register Date] Displays the date when the QC file was registered.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
68/314
9.6.2 QC charts area
The QC charts area displays the baseline and daily QC results of the QC file selected in the [QC File] list.
It consists of a [Radar Charts] tab and an [L-J Charts] tab.
⏺ [Radar Charts] tab
The latest daily QC results for %rCV, PMT voltages, and laser values of the selected QC file are displayed.
For details on radar charts, see the following:
(➤P.78 "9.10 Checking daily QC results")
⏺ [L-J Charts] tab
The L-J charts track the %rCV, PMT voltage, and laser values of daily QC to track shifts and trends in
cytometer performance and provide a visual indication of the cytometer performance over time.
For details on L-J charts, see the following:
(➤P.78 "9.10 Checking daily QC results")
Note:
The radar charts and L-J charts of a QC file are displayed after the first daily QC is performed.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
69/314
9.7 Registering lot information
When you use a new bead lot, create a QC file for the lot before proceeding to baseline setup and daily QC.
The lot information can be registered using either of the following two methods:
• Scanning the barcodes on the assay sheet for the lot
• Entering the information manually
1 Click (Registration) in the QC File list area.
The dialog box on the right appears.
[CyFlow DailyQC] is selected by default as the
[Panel Name] and [Material Name].
These fields do not need to be entered.
2 Enter the required information below.
⏺ If scanning the assay sheet’s barcodes
Scan all barcodes on the QC material’s assay sheet with the handheld barcode reader.
The lot number, expiration date, and rCV limit information for each channel will be automatically entered.
Before scanning the next barcode, make sure that the information you just scanned with the barcode reader is
correctly reflected.
[Assay Value] will be automatically selected as the value for the [Limit] field.
⏺ If entering information manually
Enter the following settings:
[Lot No.] Enter the bead lot number.
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
[Expiration Date] Click and select the expiration date of the lot. You can also enter the date
manually. You can delete the date by clicking .
Limit setting
area
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
70/314
3 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the new QC file for the lot is added at the bottom of the QC File list with the new index
number assigned.
[rCV/PMT]/[Laser] Click to switch between the [rCV/PMT] and [Laser] settings screens.
Limit setting area Click each row under [Item] and define the limit range for each item. The [PMT] of
each channel is for reference only. It is not used as a [Pass]/[Fail] judgment.
[Limit] Select the upper and lower limit settings from the drop-down menu.
• For [rCV]:
You can select [±2SD], [±3SD], [User Setting], [User Value], or [Assay Value].
• For [PMT]:
You can select [User Setting] or [User Value].
• For [Laser]:
You can select [User Setting] or [User Value].
[Limit Input] If you enter a lower/upper limit value higher/lower than the target value, the field will
be marked in red, and you cannot save the setting.
• For [rCV]:
- If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the range in the field to the right of
the [-] and [+] marks.
- If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target
values in the fields next to the [~] mark.
- If you selected [Assay Value] for [Limit], enter the value in the leftmost and
rightmost fields next to the [~] mark.
• For [PMT]:
- If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the range in the field to the right of
the [-] and [+] marks.
- If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target
values in the fields next to the [~] mark.
• For [Laser]:
- If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the range in the fields to the right
of the [-] and [+] marks.
- If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target
values in the fields next to the [~] mark.
Information
You must complete baseline setup using the newly created QC file before running the lot as daily QC.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
71/314
9.8 Performing baseline setup
1 Prepare quality control beads for running baseline setup.
For details on how to prepare the beads, check the package insert.
2 Make sure that the QC file (lot information) for the QC beads is registered in
the QC file list.
For the lot information registration procedure, see the following:
(➤P.69 "9.7 Registering lot information")
3 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is set to [Manual]. If the
mode is set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
4 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the analysis status LED/instrument status shown in the
bottom left corner of the IPU screen does not light green, wait
until it does.
Information
• For the timing of baseline setup, see the following:
(➤P.64 "9.3.1 When baseline setup is performed")
• If baseline setup for the QC file is successfully completed, the following process is not necessary.
Proceed to daily QC.
(➤P.65 "9.4.2 When daily QC is performed")
Caution
Do not use expired beads. Doing so can cause incorrect setup results.
Analysis status
indicator LED
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
72/314
5 Select the QC file and click (Baseline).
The [Baseline] dialog box appears.
6 Place the tube in the sample tube holder.
Make sure that the tube is uncapped.
Caution
Verify that the information in the QC file matches the QC beads to be run.
Caution
Place the tube in the regular sample tube position at the front of the sample tube holder.
[Baseline] dialog box
Regular sample
tube holder
Micro collection
tube holder
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
73/314
7 Click [Start] in the [Baseline] dialog box.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer and aspiration begins.
The analysis status indicator LED blinks green throughout the process.
Baseline setup takes about 5 minutes before the software generates data.
When the process finishes, the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
8 Remove the tube from the sample tube holder.
You can check that the baseline setup has been completed in either of the following ways:
• The instrument status indicated by the measurement status LED (lower left corner of the IPU screen) is lit green.
• The [OK] button in the [Baseline] dialog box is enabled with [Pass] displayed in the dialog box. If the setup
failed, the [OK] button remains disabled.
9 Check baseline.
The dialog box on the right displays the results of [rCV], [PMT], and
laser [mA] and [mW] for each [Item] in the [Value] column.
⏺ If the baseline setup is completed successfully
The [Status] in the [Baseline] dialog box displays [Pass].
Click [OK] to save the results. The dialog box closes.
Information
You cannot use the manual analysis start switch on the analyzer to start aspiration. If you press it, a
warning alarm sounds.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
74/314
⏺ If the baseline setup fails
An error message or a warning dialog box appears.
Click [Cancel] to close the [Baseline] dialog box after the progress bar closes or clicking [OK] on the warning
dialog box. Check the error by clicking the when an error message appeared.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.298 "Chapter 18: 18.2 [Help] dialog box")
If any item fails, the baseline setup cannot be completed.
Re-run the baseline setup. If it continues to fail, please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
9.9 Performing daily QC
1 Prepare quality control beads for running daily QC.
For instructions on preparing the beads, check the package insert.
2 Make sure that the QC file (lot information) for the quality control beads is
registered in the QC file list and the baseline setup is completed.
• For the QC file registration procedure, see the following:
(➤P.69 "9.7 Registering lot information")
• For baseline setup, see the following:
(➤P.71 "9.8 Performing baseline setup")
3 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [Manual]. If the mode is
set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
Note:
All alarms sounding on the IPU will stop when you press any key on the keyboard.
Information
For the timing of daily QC, see the following:
(➤P.65 "9.4.2 When daily QC is performed")
Caution
If the bead lot has expired, the expiration date in the QC file list is displayed in red.
Do not use expired beads. Doing so can cause incorrect daily QC results.
Change the bead lot and run the baseline setup using a new lot before proceeding to daily QC.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
75/314
4 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the analysis status LED/instrument status shown in the
bottom left corner of the IPU screen does not light green, wait
until it does.
5 Select the QC file and click (Daily QC).
The [Daily QC] dialog box appears.
Analysis status
indicator LED
[Daily QC] dialog box
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
76/314
6 Place the tube in the sample tube holder.
Make sure that the tube is uncapped.
7 Click [Start] in the [Daily QC] dialog box.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer and aspiration begins.
The analysis status indicator LED blinks green throughout the process.
Daily QC takes about 5 minutes before the software generates data.
When the process finishes, the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
8 Remove the tube from the sample tube holder.
You can also check whether the daily QC has been completed in any of the following ways:
• The instrument status indicated by the measurement status LED (lower left corner of the IPU screen) is lit green.
• The [OK] button in the [Daily QC] dialog box is enabled.
• [Status] in the [Daily QC] dialog box displays either [Pass] or [Fail].
Caution
Place the tube in the regular sample tube position at the front of the sample tube holder.
Information
You cannot use the manual analysis start switch on the analyzer to start aspiration. If you press it, a
warning alarm will sound.
Regular sample
tube holder
Micro collection
tube holder
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
77/314
9 Check daily QC results.
If the daily QC completes without errors, the dialog box on the right
displays the [Value] of [rCV], [PMT], and laser [mA] and [mW] for each
[Item].
⏺ If the daily QC is completed successfully
The [Status] in the [Daily QC] dialog box displays [Pass].
Click [OK] to save the results. The dialog box closes.
⏺ If the daily QC fails
An error message appears in the status area, and an alarm sounds depending on the setting.
If the results are displayed on the [Daily QC] dialog box, click [OK] to save the results after the progress bar is
closed.
Check the error by clicking the .
For details, see the following:
(➤P.298 "Chapter 18: 18.2 [Help] dialog box")
If no results are displayed on the [Daily QC] dialog box, click [Cancel] after the progress bar is closed. Check
the error by clicking the .
For details, see the following:
(➤P.298 "Chapter 18: 18.2 [Help] dialog box")
If any items fail, the daily QC run cannot be completed successfully. Before proceeding to run samples, re-run
the daily QC. If the error persists, execute cleaning and re-run the daily QC.
If the QC continues to fail, perform baseline setup again or contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
Note:
All alarms sounding on the IPU will stop when you press any key on the keyboard.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
78/314
9.10 Checking daily QC results
In the QC charts area, you can check the [Pass]/[Fail] status of daily QC results run against the baseline of a selected QC file.
9.10.1 Radar charts
The latest QC results for %rCV, PMT voltages, and laser values of the selected QC file are displayed.
Item Displays the name of each parameter. Any parameter exceeding the limit will be
highlighted in red.
Lower limit Indicates the lower limit of the parameter.
Upper limit Indicates the upper limit of the parameter.
Target Indicates the target of the parameter.
Data points Indicates the data points from the selected QC file.
Note:
• Radar charts are displayed after the first daily QC is performed for the selected QC file.
• Any point exceeding the upper or lower limit is marked with a red "X".
Data points
Lower limit
Upper limit Target
Radar chart
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
79/314
9.10.2 L-J charts
L-J charts graphically summarize the [Pass]/[Fail] status of daily QC results against upper/lower limits over time,
as well as target values of rCV%, PMT voltage, and laser values.
⏺ Command buttons area
⏺ Chart display area (left)
(Vial) Click to display a vial line to indicate that the vial was replaced.
For details on vial lines, see the following:
(➤P.83 "9.10.5 Displaying the vial line")
(Manage) Click to exclude data points of a particular daily QC from QC data management.
Select the desired QC data with the cursor and choose whether or not the date/
time data points are to be managed.
(Comment) Click to add comments on the cursor data.
For details on cursor data, see the following:
(➤P.82 "9.10.4 Managing QC data")
(Output FCS File) Click to display the submenu.
You can save daily QC results or baseline measurement results to FCS files.
(➤P.86 "9.14 Saving daily QC results to an FCS file")
(➤P.87 "9.15 Saving baseline measurement results to an FCS file")
[Item Data] Displays the names of QC parameters and the daily QC data for the date and time
selected by the cursor. When it is outside the limits, the item is highlighted in red.
[UL] Displays the upper limit value based on the selected limit setting.
Chart display area (left)
Command buttons area
Chart display area (right)
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
80/314
⏺ Chart display area (right)
The results are plotted by time and displayed in the chart area as a broken-line graph.
Each point on the chart corresponds to a single daily QC run and the type of points indicates whether the
result is within the limit (i.e., a pass) or outside the limit (i.e., a fail). It also indicates whether the data point is
used for QC management or not.
[Target] • For [rCV]:
If [User Setting], [Assay Value], or [User Value] is selected as the limit setting, the
target value from the baseline setup is displayed.
If [±2SD] or [±3SD] is selected, the target value is calculated as follows:
- When the number of data points is 1, the target will be the value of the data point.
(The result will be [Pass].)
- When the number of data points is 2, the target will be the value of the first data
point. (If the value of the second data point is within the range of the first value ± 1
minimum significant digit, the result will be [Pass].)
- When the number of data points is 3 or more, the target will be the mean value of
the previous data points after the last baseline setup or QC file setting.
• For [PMT]:
If [User Setting] or [User Value] is selected as the limit setting, the target value
from the baseline setup is displayed.
• For [Laser]:
If [User Setting] or [User Value] is selected as the limit setting, the target value
from the baseline setup is displayed.
[LL] Displays the lower limit value based on the selected limit setting.
Data points Indicates that the analysis data is within the upper and lower limits.
Indicates that the analysis data is outside the upper or lower limit.
Cursor
Comment display area
Comment marks
Data points
Vial line
Date
Baseline
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
81/314
Indicates that the analysis data is excluded from
management. The data point that is excluded from
management is not connected to the line, as shown on
the right.
Data that is excluded from management is shown in this way even if outside
the upper and lower limits.
For details on data that is excluded from management, see the following:
(➤P.82 "9.10.4 Managing QC data")
Baseline Indicates that the baseline was set up.
Vial line Indicates that the vial was changed.
Comment display
area
Displays comments on the cursor data.
Comment marks Displayed if there are any comments on the QC result.
To enter comments, see the following:
(➤P.82 "9.10.4 Managing QC data")
Indicates comments for the cursor data.
The comments appear in the comment display area.
Indicates comments for data other than cursor data.
Cursor Used to select a QC result for management.
For details about management, see the following:
(➤P.82 "9.10.4 Managing QC data")
The cursor is on the most recent QC result by default when the L-J charts
are displayed for the first time.
You can move the cursor to the result of the date/time you want to manage.
Date Displays the date and time of the QC run selected by the cursor.
Note:
• Once the number of data points of a QC item reaches 500, each new data point will delete the oldest
data point.
• If all the data points currently displayed on the chart are excluded from QC management, data points
outside the displayed area which are under management are connected.
Current display range
Lines are connected
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
82/314
9.10.3 Displaying cytometer QC results
Click the [Plots]/[QCReports]/[L-J Charts] tab to switch the display.
Move the cursor to a QC result on the L-J chart to display its plots on the [Plots] tab and QC report on the
[QCReports] tab.
9.10.4 Managing QC data
You can select a specific daily QC result by using the cursor in the L-J chart to exclude the QC result from the
daily QC management or add comments for that QC result.
For details on the L-J charts, see the following:
(➤P.79 "9.10.2 L-J charts")
⏺ Excluding a QC result from daily QC management
1 Move the cursor in the L-J chart to the QC result you want to exclude.
[Size] Select the page size (A4 or letter) from the drop-down menu.
[Zoom] If you want to zoom in (maximize) the page view, click the upper icon (+Zoom).
If you want to zoom out (minimize) the page view, click the lower icon (-Zoom).
[Display PlotPages] Select this checkbox to display the plot page in the QC reports.
(Filter) Click the (Filter) icon to specify the range of dates for which to display
measurement results on the [L-J Charts] report. The range of dates being shown is
displayed to the right of the (Filter) icon.
Note:
Cytometer QC results can be printed and exported by clicking the options under the [XF-1600 File] tab.
For details on the [XF-1600 File] tab, see the following:
(➤P.179 "Chapter 13: 13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab")
QC results
(plots) in the
workarea
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
83/314
2 Click (Manage) in the command buttons area.
The data points are changed to regardless of whether they are within the limits ( ) or outside the limits
( ).
⏺ Adding comments for a QC result
1 Move the cursor to the QC result to which you want to add comments.
2 Click (Comment) in the command buttons area.
The following dialog box appears.
3 Click [OK].
9.10.5 Displaying the vial line
The vial line can be displayed on the L-J chart to indicate when the vial was changed.
1 Move the cursor to the first QC result after changing to a new vial.
2 Click (Vial) in the command buttons area.
The vial line appears to the left of the cursor data.
To clear the vial line, repeat the procedure.
Note:
• The excluded data points remain on the L-J charts even if they are out of management.
• If you want to include the QC result in management again, repeat the same procedure.
[Comment] Comments can be added to the QC result selected by the cursor.
[None] Select this option if you do not add any comments to the selected QC result or you
want to delete comments added previously.
[Yes:] Select this option when you want to add comments. Up to 40 characters can be
entered in the field under this option.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
84/314
9.11 Managing QC files
⏺ Modifying
Select the QC file you want to modify in the [QC File] list and click (Edit QC File).
The [QC File Edit Dialog] dialog box appears.
The following items can be edited.
• [Lot No.]
• [Expiration Date]
• Limit setting area
For details, see the following:
(➤P.69 "9.7 Registering lot information", step 2)
Note:
The upper limit field will be marked in red if you enter a value lower than the target value. Check the value,
correct it, and save the setting.
Limit setting area
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
85/314
⏺ Deleting
Select the QC file you want to delete in the [QC File] list and click (Delete).
A confirmation dialog box appears. Click [OK].
9.12 Backing up QC files
1 Select the QC file you want to save.
2 Click (Backup).
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
3 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
4 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The file names are in the following format:
[QCFile][QC File number][Material Name][Lot No.].qcf
Example: [QCFile][2][CyFlow DailyQC][12345].qcf
Note:
The time required to complete the deletion depends on the data size of the QC files.
For large files, the time may be several minutes. Before deleting QC files, make sure that this time is
available.
Note:
The time required to complete the backup depends on the data size of the QC files.
For large files, the time may be several minutes. Before backing up QC files, make sure that this time is
available.
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
86/314
9.13 Restoring saved QC files
1 Click (Restore).
The [Open] dialog box appears.
2 Select the name of the files you want to restore.
3 Click [Open].
The QC file is restored.
The QC file restored is displayed at the bottom of the QC file list with the newly assigned [Index].
9.14 Saving daily QC results to an FCS file
Daily QC results can be saved to an FCS file.
1 Select the daily QC results that you want to save.
2 Click (Output FCS File)-[Daily QC].
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
3 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
4 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The file names are in the following format:
FCS_Time and date measured_CQCD_Lot number_Expiration date_Panel name_Subset panel name.fcs
Example: FCS_20220528135133_CQCD_12345_20221028_Panel name_Subset panel name.fcs
Note:
The time required to complete file restoration depends on the data size of the QC files.
For large files, the time may be several minutes. Before restoring QC files, make sure that this time is
available.
Note:
Results can be saved to an FCS file automatically when daily QC is performed.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.250 "Chapter 15: 15.4.14 Security settings")
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
87/314
9.15 Saving baseline measurement results to an FCS file
Baseline measurement results can be saved to an FCS file.
The most recent baseline measurement results for the selected daily QC results are saved.
1 Select the daily QC results that correspond to the baseline measurement
results you wish to save.
2 Click (Output FCS File)-[Baseline].
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
3 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The file names are in the following format:
FCS_Time and date measured_CQCB_Lot number_Expiration date_Panel name_Subset panel name.fcs
Example: FCS_20220528135133_CQCB_12345_20221028_Panel name_Subset panel name.fcs
Note:
Results can be saved to an FCS file automatically when baseline measurement is performed.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.250 "Chapter 15: 15.4.14 Security settings")
Chapter 9 Cytometer QC and setup
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
88/314
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
89/314
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
This chapter explains how to register panel/subset panels and workitems in the worklist before running
samples.
10.1 Worklist area
Click [Main] in the screen transition area to display the worklist area.
The worklist area consists of a [Worklist] tab and a [Panel Master] tab.
10.1.1 [Worklist] tab
The [Worklist] tab displays a list of registered workitems.
It consists of the command buttons and worklist areas.
[Worklist] tab [Panel Master] tab
[Worklist] tab
Command
buttons area
Worklist area
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
90/314
⏺ Worklist commands
(Auto Loader
Registration)
Click to open a dialog box that allows you to register a new workitem for running
samples with the auto loader.
(➤P.100 "10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)")
(Manual
Registration)
Click to open a dialog box that allows you to register a new workitem for running
samples with the sample tube holder.
(➤P.106 "10.4.2 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for manual analysis)")
(Edit) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to modify a selected workitem.
The button is disabled if no workitem is selected.
(➤P.108 "10.5 Modifying workitems")
(Active) Click to activate a selected workitem. is shown in the [Active] column.
The button is disabled if no workitem is selected.
By activating a workitem, acquisition conditions and data analysis associated with
the active workitem are displayed in the measurement condition setting area and the
workarea respectively.
Alternatively, you can double-click the workitem to activate it.
(Validate)* Click to validate results of the selected workitem.
(➤P.117 "10.10 Validating workitems")
(Reload)* Click to replace workitem data with the data of a selected state.
(➤P.117 "10.11 Reloading workitems")
(Save Subset
Panel Master)*
Click to overwrite the subset panel master with the new measurement conditions of
the selected workitem.
The button is disabled if no workitem is selected.
(➤P.124 "10.19 Updating the subset panel master")
(Merge) Click to merge event data of multiple workitems into a single result.
(➤P.121 "10.16 Merging workitems")
(Delete) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to delete a selected workitem.
The button is disabled if no workitem is selected.
(➤P.116 "10.9 Deleting workitems")
(Filter) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to enter criteria to specify the workitems
you want to display.
(➤P.111 "10.6 Filtering workitems")
(Sort) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to set the sorting order for workitems
displayed in the worklist.
(➤P.113 "10.7 Sorting workitems")
(Find) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to find a workitem matching specific
conditions.
(➤P.115 "10.8 Searching for workitems")
(Output FCS File) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to output a selected workitem to an FCS
file.
The button is disabled if no workitems are selected or a selected workitem is not
validated.
(➤P.118 "10.12 Saving validated workitems in FCS format")
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
91/314
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
(Backup) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to output a selected workitem to an
external file.
The button is disabled if no workitem is selected.
(➤P.120 "10.14 Backing up workitems")
(Restore) Click to open a dialog box that allows you to restore a saved workitem.
(➤P.121 "10.15 Restoring a saved workitem")
(Output Host) Click to output a validated workitem data to the host computer.
The button is disabled if the selected workitem is not validated.
(➤P.119 "10.13 Outputting validated workitem data to the host computer")
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
92/314
⏺ Worklist
The worklist area displays all the registered workitems.
[Err] If an error occurs during the measurement or when receiving patient data from the
host computer, the following icons will be displayed depending on the error type:
Hardware errors occurred
Measurement errors occurred
Maintenance-related or caution errors occurred
To check which errors occurred, hover the cursor over the icon. The error message
will be displayed.
If multiple errors within the same type occurred, all messages will be displayed.
If multiple types of errors occurred, all corresponding icons will be displayed.
Note:
The icon is displayed in the workarea for the workitems with these errors.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.178 "Chapter 13: 13.2 Workarea")
[Active] Displays a blue arrow if the workitem is currently active.
[Status] Displays the [Measured], [Unmeasured], or [Merged] status of the workitem.
[Validate] The icon appears if the workitem is validated.
[Host] Displays [H] if the validated workitem data is not sent to the host computer.
[Report] Displays [G] if the report data is not sent to the graphic printer or not exported as a
PDF file.
[Info.] Displays the type of workitem registration.
[P]: A workitem automatically created from data received from the PS-10
[C]: A workitem manually created on the workitem registration screen using data
received from the host computer
[M]: A workitem manually created on the workitem registration screen by entering
workitem information
[Primary ID] Displays the ID of a primary sample tube before sample preparation.
[Secondary ID] Displays the ID of a daughter sample tube after sample preparation.
[Date measured] Displays the date and time the workitem was measured.
[Panel Name] Displays the panel name.
[Subset Panel Name] Displays the subset panel name.
[Rotor Position] Displays the rotor position if the workitem is registered by [Auto Loader Registration].
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
93/314
[Rotor No.] Displays the 4-digit barcode number of the rotor if the workitem is registered by [Auto
Loader Registration].
[Register Date] Displays the date and time the workitem was registered.
[Last Update Date] Displays the date and time the workitem was last updated.
[Measured by (User
role)]
Displays the role of the user that was logged on during measurement.
[Measured by (Logon
name)]
Displays the name of the user that was logged on during measurement. No name is
displayed if the workitem is not measured yet.
[Order ID] Displays the ID of the analysis order.
[Order Name] Displays the name of the analysis order.
[Validator] Displays the name of the user who validated the workitem. No name is displayed if
the workitem is not validated.
[Validated Date] Displays the date and time the workitem was last validated.
[Host Output User] Displays the name of the user who output the workitem to the host computer. No
name is displayed if the workitem is not output to the host computer.
[Host Output Date] Displays the date and time the workitem was output to the host computer.
[Reagent ID] Displays the reagent ID.
[Reagent Name] Displays the reagent name.
[Patient ID] Displays the patient's ID.
[Patient Name] Displays the name of the patient (last name, first name)
[Patient Gender] Displays the patient's gender.
[Patient Date of Birth] Displays the patient's date of birth.
[Patient Comment] Displays comments about the patient.
[Comment] Displays comments about the workitem.
Note:
• For the following actions, the required time to complete depends on the data size.
- Registration
- Delete
- Validate
- Output FCS File
- Output Host
• If multiple workitems are selected, the number of selected workitems will appear in the worklist.
Number of
selected
workitems
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
94/314
10.1.2 [Panel Master] tab
The [Panel Master] tab displays a list of master panels and the subset panels registered.
It consists of a [Panel List] area and a [Subset Panel List] area.
⏺ Panel list
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
(Create)* Click the button to create and register a new panel using the [Panel Master Registration]
dialog box.
(➤P.96 "10.2 Registering a panel")
(Edit)* Click the button to edit the selected panel using the [Panel Master Registration] dialog box.
The button is disabled if no panel is selected.
(➤P.124 "10.20 Modifying panel/subset panels")
(Backup)* Click to open a dialog box that allows you to output a selected panel in the [Panel List] to
an external file.
The button is disabled if no panel is selected.
(➤P.128 "10.23 Backing up panels")
(Restore)* Click to open a dialog box that allows you to restore a saved panel.
(➤P.129 "10.24 Restoring a saved panel (restore)")
(Copy)* Click the button to copy the selected panel.
The button is disabled if no panel is selected.
(➤P.126 "10.21 Copying panel/subset panels")
(Delete)* Click the button to delete the selected panel.
The button is disabled if no panel is selected.
(➤P.127 "10.22 Deleting panel/subset panels")
[Active] When any subset panel under the panel is activated, is shown in this column.
[QC] is shown in this column when a Panel QC file is registered to that panel.
[Panel Name] Displays the panel name.
[Date(Add)] Displays the date and time the panel was registered.
[Date(Update)] Displays the date and time the panel was last updated.
[TotalNumberOf
DaughterTubes]
Displays the number of daughter tubes associated with the panel.
[Comment] Displays comments about the panel.
[Panel Master] tab
[Panel List]
area
[Subset Panel List]
area
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
95/314
⏺ Subset panel list
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
(Copy)* Click the button to copy the selected subset panel.
The button is disabled if no subset panel is selected.
(➤P.126 "10.21 Copying panel/subset panels")
(Delete)* Click the button to delete the selected subset panel.
The button is disabled if no subset panel is selected.
(➤P.127 "10.22 Deleting panel/subset panels")
(Active)* Click to activate a selected subset panel and is shown in the [Active] column.
The button is disabled if no subset panel is selected.
By activating the subset panel item, acquisition conditions and data analysis
associated with the active
subset panel are displayed in the measurement condition setting area and the
workarea respectively.
(Save)* Click to save or overwrite the selected subset panel master with acquisition
conditions and plots defined.
The button is disabled if no subset panel is activated.
[Active] is shown in this column for the activated subset panel.
[Subset Panel Name] Displays the subset panel name.
[Date measured] Displays the date and time the subset panel was last measured.
[Reagent ID] Displays the reagent ID of the subset panel.
[Reagent Name] Displays the reagent name of the subset panel.
[Date(Add)] Displays the date and time the subset panel was registered.
[Date(Update)] Displays the date and time the subset panel was last updated.
[Comment] Displays comments about the subset panel.
[DaughterTubeNumber] Displays the daughter tube number.
Note:
For the following actions, the required time to complete depends on the data size.
• Backup
• Delete
• Copy
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
96/314
10.2 Registering a panel
You can create a panel which consists of one or more subset panels. The subset panel has the following setting
information to obtain suitable results for each sample tube.
• Channels to be acquired, the name of each channel, and the parameters: [Height], [Area], or [Width]
• Threshold for each channel
• Gain/PMT voltage for each channel
• Flow rate during acquisition
• Sample volume
• Laser control (ON/OFF)
• Stop conditions that specify when the acquisition will end
• Compensation (spillover values)
• Plots and gates to be displayed
• Statistics to be displayed
• Report settings
When you create a workitem, you must select a panel and the associated subset panels from the list of those already
registered. The settings of the subset panel you selected are used for acquisition. Both panels and subset panels can
be newly created or edited.
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered master panels
appears. If a panel is selected, the
associated subset panels are also
displayed.
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
97/314
2 Click (Create) in the [Panel List] area.
The [Panel Master Registration] dialog
box appears.
3 Populate the displayed fields.
4 Click (Add) in the [Panel Master Registration] dialog box.
The [Subset Panel Registration] dialog
box appears.
5 Populate the displayed fields.
[Panel Name] (mandatory) Enter the panel name.
Do not use the name "CyFlow DailyQC", which is already reserved as the
panel/material name for cytometer QC.
[Comment] Enter comments about the panel.
[Subset Panel Name] (mandatory) Enter the subset panel name.
[Comment] Enter comments about the subset panel.
[Reagent Name] Enter the reagent name.
[Reagent ID] Enter the reagent ID.
[Panel Master Registration] dialog box
[Subset Panel Registration] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
98/314
6 Click [OK].
The subset panel is registered and the dialog box closes.
The subset panel created is displayed in the [Panel Master Registration] dialog box.
To register another subset panel, repeat steps 4 to 6.
You can register up to 24 subset panels for one panel.
7 Click [OK] in the [Panel Master Registration] screen.
The master panel is registered. The newly created panel is added at the bottom of the [Panel List], and the
subset panels are also shown in the [Subset Panel List] when the panel is selected in the [Panel List].
10.3 Registering subset panel analysis conditions while
running a sample
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered master panels
appears. If a panel is selected, the
associated subset panels are also
displayed.
2 Select a panel from the panel list.
3 To register analysis conditions, select a subset panel from the subset panel
list, and click (Active).
The measurement condition setting area and the workarea will change for the active subset panel.
4 Click the [Settings] tab and change the settings as necessary.
For details on setting items, see the following:
(➤P.164 "Chapter 12: 12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
5 Click the [Stops] tab and change the settings as necessary.
For details on setting items, see the following:
(➤P.166 "Chapter 12: 12.2.2 Setting stop conditions")
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
99/314
6 Add plots and gates as needed in the [Plots] tab of the workarea.
For details on adding plots in the workarea, see the following:
(➤P.188 "Chapter 13: 13.5.2 [Add Plot] group")
7 Run the sample with the sample tube holder.
For details on running samples, see the following:
(➤P.174 "Chapter 12: 12.3.2 Running a sample with the sample tube holder (manual analysis)")
8 Change the settings on the [Settings] tab while checking the data shown on
the plots during measurement.
Threshold and Gain/PMT setting areas are enabled at the start of acquisition. Changes to the settings will be
reflected on the plot immediately. For details, see the following:
• Threshold (➤P.164 "Chapter 12: 12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
• Gain/PMT (➤P.164 "Chapter 12: 12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
If any of the above settings are changed while particles are being acquired, data acquired up to that point will
be discarded.
You can also make the following changes in the workarea:
- Add plots, gates, and statistics tables
- Change plots, gates, and statistics tables*
- Perform a manual compensation
* If [Event Count] is selected as a stop condition, you can still change the gate selected as [Stop Condition], its
parent gate, and the plots which contain these gates, but cannot delete the gate or the plot containing the
gate.
In the above case:
- The run will be stopped when it meets the changed conditions.
- If the stop conditions are met immediately after the change has been made and the run has been stopped,
the number of acquired events will be displayed on the plot.
9 Once you finish making changes to the settings and the run is complete, click
(Save).
The analysis conditions on the subset panel will be registered.
10 Perform compensation as necessary.
(➤P.193 "Chapter 13: 13.7 [Compensation] tab")
Note:
To save changed settings, click the (Save) button. If you try to display a different screen without saving
the changes, a confirmation dialog box appears.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
100/314
11 Click (Save).
10.4 Registering a workitem in the worklist
A workitem consists of associated panel/subset panel information, together with the status/results of
measurement and sample information, allowing you to manage the information collectively.
The workitem registration procedure depends on whether you are using the auto loader or the sample tube
holder to perform analysis.
For details on using the auto loader, see the following:
(➤P.100 "10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)")
For details on using the sample tube holder, see the following:
(➤P.106 "10.4.2 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for manual analysis)")
10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
Note:
• To save changed settings, click the (Save) button. If you try to display a different screen without
saving the changes, a confirmation dialog box appears.
• You can back up measurement condition settings and the compensation matrix to an external file, and
apply them to a different subset panel or an unmeasured workitem.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.181 "13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab ⏺[Backup]")
Note:
• The worklist can contain up to 10,000 workitems if there is more than 50 GB of available space on the
hard disk drive.
• It is recommended to back up and delete old workitems periodically to avoid slowing down the IPU.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.181 "13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab ⏺[Backup]")
• If you try to register a new workitem exceeding the maximum number, a confirmation dialog box appears,
depending on the setting. If you click [OK] to proceed, the oldest workitem will be automatically deleted.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.246 "15.4.9 Worklist")
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
101/314
2 Click (Auto Loader Registration) in the worklist commands.
The [Workitem Registration (Auto Loader)]
dialog box appears.
3 Enter the 4-digit rotor number in the [Rotor No.] field.
For details on the rotor number, see the following:
(➤P.47 "Chapter 7: 7.3.1 Barcode labels for rotors")
The rotor type for the entered rotor number will be automatically displayed under [Rotor Type].
4 Register a workitem for each primary ID.
You can create a workitem in the following two ways:
• Create a workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer. (➤P.101 "10.4.1.4 ⏺ If creating
the workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer")
• Create a workitem manually. (➤P.103 "10.4.1.4 ⏺ If creating the workitem manually")
⏺ If creating the workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer
1 Click [HOST].
The screen on the right appears.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
102/314
2 Enter the [Primary ID].
Alternatively, you can scan the barcode on the sample tube with the handheld barcode reader, if the
barcode label meets the requirements.
For details on acceptable barcode specifications, see the following:
(➤P.44 "7.2.1 Acceptable barcodes for sample tubes")
3 Click the [Query Host] button.
The information acquired from the host computer is displayed under
[Patient Information], [Measurement Information], and [Workitem
Information].
If the following [Warning] dialog boxes are displayed, take the indicated steps.
• [Host communication failure occurred. Check the host setting], [Host communication message is
inconsistent. Check the host setting.]:
Please contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
• [Cannot get order from host computer. Check the host setting.]:
Please check if the order for the entered primary ID exists on the host computer.
• [Unmeasurable panel specified. Check the host setting.]:
A panel name that is not registered in the XF-1600 was specified by the host computer. Please check the
panel name on the host computer.
4 Check the displayed information and enter or correct the [Secondary ID]
as necessary.
• If [Automatic] is selected for [Workitem]-[Secondary ID input] in the IPU settings:
The [Secondary ID] field displays the ID specified by the host computer. If no secondary ID is specified
by the host computer, the system automatically assigns a secondary ID.
• If [Manual] is selected for [Workitem]-[Secondary ID input] in the IPU settings:
The [Secondary ID] field displays the ID specified by the host computer. If no secondary ID is specified
by the host computer, this field will be blank.
Enter your secondary ID in the field.
For details on the IPU setting, see the following:
(➤P.247 "Chapter 15: 15.4.10 Workitem")
Information
If the host computer connection setting under the IPU settings is not "ON", the button is disabled and you
cannot click it.
For more information about how to check the connection to the host computer, see the following:
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
103/314
5 Make sure that the panel/subset panel name for the primary ID is selected
with in the [Target] column.
If there is an unnecessary subset panel, deselect it. By default, all subset panels are selected.
6 Click [OK].
The screen closes and the acquired information is displayed in the [Workitem Registration (Auto Loader)]
dialog box.
Go to step 5.
(➤P.105 "10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)", step 5)
To cancel the registration, click the [Cancel] button. A confirmation dialog box appears. If you click [OK], the
screen closes and returns to the [Workitem Registration (Auto Loader)] dialog box.
⏺ If creating the workitem manually
1 Click [ADD].
The screen on the right appears.
Note:
• Alternatively, you can scan the barcode on the sample tube with the handheld barcode reader, if the
barcode label meets the requirements.
For details on acceptable barcode specifications, see the following:
(➤P.44 "7.2.1 Acceptable barcodes for sample tubes")
• You can also enter a [Workitem Comment], as necessary.
Note:
Deselecting a [Target] column does not cause the secondary ID or workitem comment to be deleted.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
104/314
2 Enter the [Primary ID].
Alternatively, you can scan the barcode on the sample tube with the handheld barcode reader, if the
barcode label meets the requirements.
For details on acceptable barcode specifications, see the following:
(➤P.44 "7.2.1 Acceptable barcodes for sample tubes")
3 Enter the [Patient Information] and [Measurement Information].
4 Select the panel from the [Panel Name] drop-down menu.
The [Subset Panel Name] and [Subset Panel
Comment] are displayed in the [Subset Panel
Information] area.
5 Check the displayed information and enter or correct the [Secondary ID]
as necessary.
• If [Automatic] is selected for [Workitem]-[Secondary ID input] in the IPU settings:
The [Secondary ID] field displays the ID automatically assigned. If you want to change it, reenter the ID.
• If [Manual] is selected for [Workitem]-[Secondary ID input] in the IPU settings:
Enter the secondary ID in the [Secondary ID] field.
For details on the IPU setting, see the following:
(➤P.247 "Chapter 15: 15.4.10 Workitem")
6 Make sure that the subset panel name for the primary ID is selected with
in the [Target] column.
If there is an unnecessary subset panel, deselect it. By default, all subset panels are selected.
Note:
• Alternatively, you can scan the barcode on the sample tube with the handheld barcode reader, if the
barcode label meets the requirements.
For details on acceptable barcode specifications, see the following:
(➤P.44 "7.2.1 Acceptable barcodes for sample tubes")
• You can also enter a [Workitem Comment], as necessary.
Note:
Deselecting a [Target] column does not cause the secondary ID or workitem comment to be deleted.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
105/314
7 Click [OK].
The screen closes and the entered information is displayed in the [Workitem Registration (Auto Loader)]
dialog box.
Go to step 5.
(➤P.105 "10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)", step 5)
To cancel the registration, click the [Cancel] button. The confirmation dialog box appears. If you click [OK],
the screen closes and returns to the [Workitem Registration (Auto Loader)] dialog box.
5 Check or edit the registered information.
• The following information is displayed in the [Info.] area:
C: if the workitem was acquired from the host computer
M: if the workitem was entered manually
• To display the workitem information on the right side of the screen, select the row under [Rotor Pos.
Information].
• Use the up and down buttons to change the tube position.
• To cancel the added workitem, select the row and click the [DELETE] button.
6 If necessary, register additional workitems for the remaining tubes in the
same rotor.
Repeat the procedure from step 4.
(➤P.101 "10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)", step 4)
Any additional workitems are registered at the next available position after previously registered workitems.
7 Click [OK] once you complete defining all of the tubes for the selected rotor.
The dialog box closes and the workitems are registered.
The newly created workitems are highlighted in blue in the worklist.
If you click the [Cancel] button, the workitems will not be added in the worklist.
Info.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
106/314
10.4.2 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for manual analysis)
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Manual Registration) in the worklist commands.
The [Workitem Registration (Manual)]
dialog box appears.
3 Register a workitem for each primary ID.
You can create a workitem in the following two ways:
• Create a workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer. (➤P.106 "10.4.2.3 ⏺ If creating
the workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer")
• Create a workitem manually. (➤P.107 "10.4.2.3 ⏺ If creating the workitem manually")
⏺ If creating the workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer
Sub-steps 1 to 5 are the same procedures described in “10.4.1.4 Register a workitem for each primary ID.”
(➤P.101 "10.4.1.4 ⏺ If creating the workitem by acquiring workitem information from the host computer")
1 Click [HOST].
2 Enter the [Primary ID].
3 Click the [Query Host] button.
4 Check the displayed information and enter or correct the [Secondary ID]
as necessary.
5 Make sure that the panel/subset panel name for the primary ID is selected
with in the [Target] column.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
107/314
6 Click [OK].
The screen closes and the acquired information is displayed in the [Workitem Registration (Manual)] dialog
box.
Go to step 4.
(➤P.108 "10.4.2 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for manual analysis)", step 4)
To cancel the registration, click the [Cancel] button. The confirmation dialog box appears. If you click [OK],
the screen closes and returns to the [Workitem Registration (Manual)] dialog box.
⏺ If creating the workitem manually
Sub-steps 1 to 6 are the same procedures described in “10.4.1.4 Register a workitem for each primary ID.”
(➤P.103 "10.4.1.4 ⏺ If creating the workitem manually")
1 Click [ADD].
2 Enter the [Primary ID].
3 Enter the [Patient Information] and [Measurement Information].
4 Select the panel from the [Panel Name] drop-down menu.
5 Check the displayed information and enter or correct the [Secondary ID]
as necessary.
6 Make sure that the subset panel name for the primary ID is selected with
in the [Target] column.
7 Click [OK].
The screen closes and the entered information is displayed in the [Workitem Registration (Manual)] dialog
box.
Go to step 4.
(➤P.108 "10.4.2 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for manual analysis)", step 4)
To cancel the registration, click the [Cancel] button. The confirmation dialog box appears. If you click [OK],
the screen closes and returns to the [Workitem Registration (Manual)] dialog box.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
108/314
4 Check or edit the registered information.
• The following information is displayed in the [Info.] area:
C: If the workitem was acquired from the host computer
M: If the workitem was entered manually
• To display the workitem information on the right side of the screen, select the row under [Workitem
Information].
• To cancel the added workitem, select the row and click the [DELETE] button.
5 Click [OK] once you complete defining all of the tubes.
The dialog box closes and the workitems are registered.
If you click the [Cancel] button, the workitems will not be registered in the worklist.
10.5 Modifying workitems
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem you want to modify in the worklist.
Note:
If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be modified is the
selected one, not the activated one.
Info.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
109/314
3 Click (Edit) in the worklist commands.
⏺ For autoloader analysis workitems
The screen on the right is displayed.
The selected workitem is highlighted in
blue in the list under [Rotor Pos.
Information]. The workitem information is
displayed on the right side of the screen.
⏺ For manual analysis workitems
The screen on the right is displayed.
The selected workitem is highlighted in
blue in the list. The workitem information is
displayed on the right side of the screen.
Note:
If the selected workitem was received from the PS-10 and the XF-1600 failed to receive the patient
information, appears in the [Query Status].
Click the [Query Patient Info.] button next to [Patient Information] to receive the patient information from the
host computer. If the information is successfully received, will disappear.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
110/314
4 Edit the fields that need to be modified.
The following information can be edited, subject to the indicated conditions:
⏺ If the workitem has not been measured
* “Yes” if the user is an administrator.
⏺ If the workitem has been measured
* “Yes” if the user is an administrator.
5 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes, and the workitems are modified.
Workitem information
Workitem registration method and IPU settings
Manual input
Acquired from the host computer/PS-10
If editing of HOST/PS-10
information is enabled (check
mark under [Workitem Edit])
If editing of HOST/PS-10
information is disabled (no check
mark under [Workitem Edit])
Patient information
Yes Yes No*
Panel information
Subset panel information
Primary ID
Secondary ID
Order ID
Order name
Workitem comment
Information
Workitem registration method and settings
Manual input
Acquired from the host computer/PS-10
If editing of HOST/PS-10
information is enabled (check
mark under [Workitem Edit])
If editing of HOST/PS-10
information is disabled (no check
mark under [Workitem Edit])
Patient information Yes Yes No*
Panel information No No No
Subset panel information No No No
Primary ID Yes Yes No*
Secondary ID Yes Yes No*
Order ID Yes Yes No*
Order name Yes Yes No*
Workitem comment Yes Yes No*
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
111/314
10.6 Filtering workitems
You can filter workitems by conditions that you specify. To filter workitems, you must first register the filter conditions.
10.6.1 Registering filter conditions
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Filter) in the worklist commands.
The [Filter] dialog box appears.
3 Select the desired filter name checkbox in the [Filter Information] field.
4 Change the filter name in the [Filter Name] field as necessary.
5 Set the filter conditions in the [Conditions] field.
To enable the filter settings, select the checkbox on the left. Each time you click the checkbox, the checkbox is
selected or unselected.
[Date measured] Specify the measurement start date or measurement end date.
[Status] Specify the workitem status.
[Error] Select either [No Error] or [Error].
[Validate] Select either [Not Validated] or [Validated].
[Host Output] Select either [Not Output] or [Output].
[Panel Name] Enter the workitem panel name.
[Subset Panel Name] Enter the subset panel name.
[Filter] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
112/314
6 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes, and the workitems are filtered by the conditions of the checked filter name.
10.6.2 Filtering workitems
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Filter) in the worklist commands.
The [Filter] dialog box appears.
3 Select the checkbox for the filter name for which filtering criteria have been
registered.
4 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes, and the workitems are filtered.
The name of the selected filter name appears in the upper left corner of the worklist.
[Measured by (Logon name)] Enter the user name.
[Patient ID] Enter the patient ID.
[Filter] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
113/314
10.7 Sorting workitems
You can sort workitems by criteria that you specify. To sort workitems, you must first register the sort criteria.
10.7.1 Registering sort criteria
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Sort) in the worklist commands.
The [Sort] dialog box appears.
3 Select the checkbox of the desired sort name in the [Sort Information] field.
4 Change the sort name in the [Sort Name] field as necessary.
5 Set the sort criteria in the [Conditions] field.
You can set sort criteria in the [1st Key] to the [5th Key].
The sort criteria are prioritized from the [1st Key] to the [5th Key].
When you set a criterion, numbers and letters are sorted in ascending order (0 to 9, A to Z) or descending order
(9 to 0, Z to A).
[None] Criterion not specified.
[Date measured] Sort by date and time of analysis.
[Register Date] Sort by workitem registration date and time.
[Primary ID] Sort by primary ID number.
[Secondary ID] Sort by secondary ID number.
[Asc.] Choose to sort into ascending order.
[Desc.] Choose to sort into descending order.
[Sort] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
114/314
6 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes, and workitems are sorted by the conditions of checked sort name.
10.7.2 Changing the workitem sort order
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Sort) in the worklist commands.
The [Sort] dialog box appears.
3 Select the checkbox for the sort name for which sort criteria have been
registered.
4 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes, and the workitems are sorted.
The name of the selected sort name appears in the upper left corner of the worklist.
[Sort] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
115/314
10.8 Searching for workitems
You can search for workitems by entering primary ID, secondary ID, patient ID, patient last name, or patient first
name.
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Find) in the worklist commands.
The [Find] dialog box appears.
3 Enter the search conditions.
4 Set the match condition for the search.
If you want to find results that are an exact match for the specified criteria, select the [Find exact matches]
checkbox.
If you clear the checkbox, results that partially match the specified criteria will also be found.
[Primary ID] Enter the workitem primary ID you want to use as a search criterion.
[Secondary ID] Enter the workitem secondary ID you want to use as a search criterion.
[Patient ID] Enter the patient ID you want to use as a search criterion.
[Patient Last Name] Enter the patient last name you want to use as a search criterion.
[Patient First Name] Enter the patient first name you want to use as a search criterion.
[Find] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
116/314
5 Click [PREV.]/[NEXT].
The workitem that matches the search criteria is selected in the worklist.
6 Click [Close].
The dialog box closes.
10.9 Deleting workitems
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem that you want to delete from the worklist.
3 Click (Delete) in the worklist commands.
The deletion confirmation dialog box appears.
4 Click [OK].
The workitem is deleted from the worklist.
[PREV.] Click to search up from the result selected in the worklist.
[NEXT] Click to search down from the result selected in the worklist.
Note:
If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be deleted is the
selected one, not the activated one.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
117/314
10.10 Validating workitems
When a workitem is validated, the analysis data is approved and output to the host computer or your printer.
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
2 Select the workitem that you want to validate from the worklist.
3 Click (Validate) in the worklist commands.
The icon appears in the [Validate] column.
If the selected workitem is already validated, validation is canceled and the icon disappears.
10.11 Reloading workitems
You can revert workitem data to its state immediately after measurement by reloading workitems. You can also revert
the data to its state at the time of the last validation operation by canceling the workitem validate operation.
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem that you want to reload, and click (Active).
Caution
Confirm the measurement results before validating workitems.
Note:
If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be validated is the
selected one, not the activated one.
Note:
• If hardware or measurement errors occur during the measurement of validated workitems, the error
information will be included in the data (saved in FCS format or exported to the host computer) or in the
report. For details on these errors, see the following:
(➤P.299 "Chapter 18: 18.3 Causes of errors and remedial actions")
• After validating, you cannot edit the workitem or create a report. If you need to change any information,
click (Validate) to cancel the validation.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
118/314
3 Click (Reload) in the worklist commands.
The [Reload] dialog box appears.
You cannot click (Reload) if the icon is
displayed in the [Validate] column.
4 Select [Measured] or [Validated].
• To revert the data to its state immediately after measurement, select [Measured].
• To revert the data to its state at the time of the last validation operation, select [Validated].
5 Click [OK].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
6 Click [OK].
The data is reloaded.
10.12 Saving validated workitems in FCS format
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem that you want to save in FCS format.
3 Click (Output FCS File) in the worklist commands.
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
Note:
• (Output FCS File) is enabled only when the selected workitem has been validated.
• If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be saved is the
selected one, not the activated one.
[Reload] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
119/314
4 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
5 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected location.
The file names are in the following format:
FCS_Date measured_Primary ID_Secondary ID_Panel name_Subset panel name.fcs
Example: FCS_20220528135133_12345_12345-1_Panel_SubsetPanel.fcs
10.13 Outputting validated workitem data to the host
computer
You can ouput workitem data to the host computer. Only validated workitem data can be exported.
Make sure that the XF-1600 is connected to the host computer by checking the status area.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.59 "Chapter 8: 8.6.2 Status area")
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the validated workitem that you want to output to the host computer.
3 Click (Output Host) in the worklist commands.
If a connection error occurs, a dialog box appears.
Note:
• If the primary/secondary ID contains characters that cannot be used for file names in Windows (\/:*?"
<>|), they are automatically converted to spaces in the file name.
• Patient information can be included when saving FCS files.
For more information about the setting for including patient information, see the following:
(➤P.250 "Chapter 15: 15.4.14 Security settings")
Note:
If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be output is the selected
one, not the activated one.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
120/314
4 Confirm that [H] disappears in the [Host] column in the worklist.
If [H] is displayed, the workitem data is not output to the host computer.
10.14 Backing up workitems
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem that you want to save.
3 Click (Backup) in the worklist commands.
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
4 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
5 Click [OK].
The [Backup] dialog box appears.
6 Enter a password for restoring the backup data and the file name, and click
[OK].
The file name is displayed in a dialog box. If you do not wish to change it, click [OK] after entering a password.
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The file names are in the following format.
If only one workitem is selected:
Workitem number_Primary ID_Secondary ID.xfsmp2
Example: 100_12345_12345-1.xfsmp2
Note:
When [Auto Host Output] is enabled, the workitem data will be automatically exported to the host computer
after validation.
For details on the setting, see the following:
(➤P.249 "Chapter 15: 15.4.13 Output")
Note:
If a different workitem is activated in the worklist at the same time, the workitem to be saved is the selected
one, not the activated one.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
121/314
If multiple workitems are selected:
[XF][Version][Workitem][Save date_Save time].xfsmp2
Example: [XF][00-01][Workitem][20220722_153030].xfsmp2
10.15 Restoring a saved workitem
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Click (Restore) in the worklist commands.
The [Open] dialog box appears.
3 Select the name of the files you want to restore.
4 Click [Open].
The [Restore] dialog box appears.
5 Enter the password that you set when backing up the data, and click [OK].
The workitems are restored.
The restored workitems are displayed at the top of the worklist.
10.16 Merging workitems
You can merge acquired data of multiple workitems into a single result and reanalyze it. After merging, a new merged
workitem will be added to the worklist.
Requirements for merging
• The workitems to be merged must have the same measurement conditions (i.e., the selected channels and height/
area/width).
• Workitems must be measured before merging.
Note:
If the primary/secondary ID contains characters that cannot be used for file names in Windows (\/:*?" <>|),
they are automatically converted to spaces in the file name.
Caution
Make sure that the workitem data which you are trying to merge are from the same primary sample.
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
122/314
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem which you want to set as the primary workitem for
merging.
3 Click (Merge) in the worklist commands.
The [Merge] dialog box on the right appears.
4 From the worklist, select the workitems that you want to merge into the
primary workitem.
If you merge multiple workitems into the primary workitem, select the workitems while holding down the Shift or
Ctrl key.
The selected workitems will be displayed under [Workitems to be merged] in the [Merge] dialog box.
Note:
• The following data of the first selected (primary) workitem is applied to a merged workitem to be newly
created:
- Patient information
- Measurement conditions
- Analysis conditions set in the workarea
• You can merge up to 24 workitems with up to 5,000,000 events for each workitem.
• An error message appears if the available space on the hard disk drive is not enough to accommodate
the merged workitem.
[Merge] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
123/314
5 Click [Merge].
When merging is successfully completed, the dialog box on the
right appears.
6 Click [OK].
7 Confirm that a new workitem merging the selected workitems is added to the
top of the worklist.
The [Status] of the merged workitem displays [Merged].
10.17 Configuring acquisition conditions
You can modify the acquisition conditions of an unmeasured workitem in the measurement condition setting area
before running the sample.
Make sure that the workitem is activated so that the measurement condition setting area being displayed is for the
workitem you want to configure.
(➤P.164 "Chapter 12: 12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
10.18 Configuring compensation and creating plots
If needed, you can configure compensation and create plots for an active workitem before running the sample.
Make sure that the workitem is activated so that the workarea being displayed is for the workitem you want to
configure.
(➤P.177 "Chapter 13 Data analysis tools")
Note:
If you select workitems that cannot be merged, the [Warning] dialog box appears. Click [OK] to close the
[Warning] dialog box. After clicking [Cancel] in the [Merge] dialog box, go back to step 2 to reselect
workitems that can be merged.
Note:
Modified settings are used for acquisition of the workitem but do not overwrite the panel/subset panel
master unless you click (Save Subset Panel Master) in the worklist commands.
(➤P.124 "10.19 Updating the subset panel master")
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
124/314
10.19 Updating the subset panel master
1 Click the [Worklist] tab in the worklist area.
The worklist appears.
2 Select the workitem with the new measurement conditions which you want to
apply to the subset panel master.
3 Click (Save Subset Panel Master).
The new settings overwrite the subset panel master.
10.20 Modifying panel/subset panels
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered master panels
appears. If a panel is selected, the
associated subset panels are also
displayed.
2 Select the panel you want to modify from the panel list.
Note:
If a different workitem is currently activated in the worklist, the workitem used to overwrite the subset panel
master is the selected one, not the activated one.
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
125/314
3 Click (Edit).
The [Panel Master Registration] dialog
box appears.
4 Edit the fields you want to modify.
If you want to update the subset panel master, select the subset panel you want to modify, click (Edit), and
edit the items that appear in the [Subset Panel Registration] dialog box.
5 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes.
Click [OK] in the [Panel Master Registration] dialog box and the selected panel master is updated.
Note:
If there is an unmeasured workitem associated with the
subset panel, the dialog box on the right appears.
Click [OK]. Confirm the change and edit the workitem if
needed.
[Panel Master Registration] dialog box
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
126/314
10.21 Copying panel/subset panels
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered panels appears. If
a panel is selected, the associated
subset panels are also displayed.
2 Select the panel or subset panel you want to copy.
3 Click (Copy).
A dialog box appears.
4 Enter a new name of the copied panel or subset panel.
5 Click [OK].
The copied panel or subset panel is added to the bottom of the panel list or the subset panel list.
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
127/314
10.22 Deleting panel/subset panels
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered panels appears. If
a panel is selected, the associated
subset panels are also displayed.
2 Select the panel or subset panel you want to delete from the panel or subset
panel list.
3 Click (Delete).
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4 Click [OK].
The panel or subset panel is deleted.
Note:
If there is an unmeasured workitem associated with the
panel, the dialog box on the right appears.
Click [OK]. The associated unmeasured workitem remains in
the worklist.
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
128/314
10.23 Backing up panels
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered panels appears. If
a panel is selected, the associated
subset panels are also displayed.
2 Select the panel that you want to save.
3 Click (Backup).
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the save location.
4 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
5 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The file names are in the following format:
Panel_Panel number_Panel name.pnl
Example: Panel_2_Panel2.pnl
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
129/314
10.24 Restoring a saved panel (restore)
1 Click the [Panel Master] tab in the worklist area.
A list of registered panels appears. If
a panel is selected, the associated
subset panels are also displayed.
2 Click (Restore).
The [Open] dialog box appears.
3 Select the panels you want to restore.
4 Click [Open].
A dialog box appears.
5 Enter a new name for the restored panel.
6 Click [OK].
The panels are restored.
The restored panels are added to the bottom of the panel list with the restored date and time displayed in the
[Date(Add)] column.
[Panel Master] tab
Panel list
Subset
panel list
Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
130/314
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
131/314
Chapter 11 Panel QC
11.1 Overall panel QC workflow
The flowchart below shows the sequence of panel QC procedures. The typical workflow is shown in gray.
Perform panel QC
Yes
No
Has the panel been measured?
Yes
Has a panel QC file been No
registered for the panel you want
to run?
Yes
No
Checked panel QC results?
Running Samples ➤P.163
Registering a panel QC file ➤P.137
Check results ➤P.154
Performing daily panel QC ➤P.147
Panel QC is complete Next step Run samples ➤P.163
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
132/314
11.2 Overview of panel QC (baseline setup and daily panel QC)
Panel QC is a set of procedures to ensure that the settings for a panel/subset panel are appropriate.
The process involves:
• Creation of a QC file including setting up the baselines
• Daily panel QC
First establish the subset panel's baselines (QC items to be monitored by panel QC), then perform daily panel QC.
The system monitors changes in the defined settings in daily panel QC results.
11.2.1 Overview of panel QC file creation
When creating a panel QC file, you define which data should be monitored for each subset panel. Each QC item
to be monitored can be selected from [Gain/PMT], [Compensation], [Statistics], and [Laser].
11.2.2 Overview of daily panel QC and when it is performed
After a panel QC file has been created and the baselines/limits are set up for each QC item, run the daily panel
QC to check for variation from those baselines.
In this process, the software automatically measures and records the setting values.
The results can be viewed by radar charts, L-J charts, and plots.
The following are guidelines for when daily panel QC should be performed:
• Before using the panel for the sample you want to run
• After major troubleshooting or servicing of the instrument
• When you have concerns about the accuracy of the panel settings
11.2.3 Type of daily panel QC
The L-J control is applied in the software to automatically track the setup values over time, monitor the
performance, and see shifts or trends in parameters as they occur.
Note:
To monitor Gain/PMT values in daily panel QC, you can use CyFlow GainSet by creating a panel with
subset panel for CyFlow GainSet. You can also add a new subset panel for CyFlow GainSet under an
existing panel.
For more details on procedures suitable for your laboratory, please contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
Note:
If compensation values are set as panel QC items to be monitored or adjusted automatically, an automatic
compensation must be performed when registering the panel/subset panel master.
For more details, see the following:
(➤P.99 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Registering subset panel analysis conditions while running a sample", step 10)
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
133/314
11.3 Panel QC files
A [QC File] is created for each panel to define the QC items and the baselines, then monitor the daily panel QC
results. It can contain the following information:
• Panel/Subset panel information
• Channels/Parameters and their baselines of [Gain/PMT], [Compensation], [Statistics], and [Laser]
• Lot number and expiration date of QC material
• Limit information
• Daily panel QC results displayed on radar charts, L-J charts, and plots
11.4 Panel QC screen
Click [QC] in the screen transition area, then select [Panel QC & Setup].
The worklist and measurement condition setting area on the main screen change to the panel QC screen below.
Note:
Up to 50 panel QC files can be saved. One panel QC file can contain up to 200 items, and a maximum of
200 data points can be recorded for each item. After 200 data points are reached, each new data point
automatically deletes the oldest data point.
Panel QC file list area
Panel QC charts area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
134/314
11.4.1 Panel QC file list area
The panel QC file list area displays a list of panel QC files and the corresponding subset panels to each panel
QC file. It consists of the [QC File] on the left and the [Subset Panel] on the right.
⏺ Panel QC file
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
⏺ Subset panel
(Daily QC) Click this icon to perform daily panel QC.
The icon is disabled when the selected QC file is disabled.
(Registration)* Click this icon to register a panel QC file.
(➤P.137 "11.6 Registering a panel QC file")
(Edit QC File)* Click this icon to edit the selected panel QC file.
(➤P.161 "11.9 Managing panel QC files")
(Delete)* Click this icon to delete the selected panel QC file.
(➤P.161 "11.9 Managing panel QC files")
(Backup)* Click this icon to open a dialog box to select which data you would like to export.
Another dialog box will appear asking to specify the export location for the
selected panel QC file.
This button is disabled if no panel QC file is selected.
(Restore)* Click this button to open a dialog box that allows you to restore a saved QC file.
[View Only] indicates that the referencing panel/subset panels have been deleted. It is no
longer possible to conduct daily panel QC using the QC file. It can only be viewed.
[Index] Displays the panel QC file number that is automatically assigned by increments of
1 when registered.
[Lot No.] Displays the lot number for the QC file.
[Panel Name] Displays the panel name.
[QC File Name] Displays the panel QC file name.
[Daily QC] Displays the last daily panel QC results for the selected panel QC file. Either
[Pass] or [Fail] is shown after the daily panel QC. If any subset panel under the
panel QC file fails, it displays [Fail].
[Last Daily QC Date] Displays the latest measured date and time of daily panel QC.
[Register Date] Displays the date when the panel QC file was registered.
[Lot No.] Displays the lot number for the QC file.
[Subset Panel Name] Displays the name of the subset panel.
[Status] Displays the last daily panel QC results of the selected subset panel.
Either [Pass] or [Fail] is shown after running daily panel QC.
[Exp. Date] Displays the expiration date for the material used for panel QC.
[Comment] Displays comments about the subset panel.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
135/314
11.4.2 Panel QC charts area
The panel QC charts area displays the baseline and daily panel QC results of the panel QC file selected in the
[QC File] list. It consists of a [Radar Charts] tab on the left and an [L-J Charts] tab on the right.
⏺ [Radar Charts] tab
The latest daily panel QC results of the selected subset panel under the panel QC file are displayed in radar
charts.
For details on radar charts, see the following:
(➤P.154 "11.8 Checking daily panel QC results")
Note:
For the following actions, the required time to complete depends on the data size.
• Registration
• Edit QC File
[Radar Charts] tab [L-J Charts] tab
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
136/314
⏺ [L-J Charts] tab
The L-J charts tracks daily panel QC results of defined QC items of the selected subset panel. They provide a
visual indication of the values over time to check for shifts and trends.
For details on L-J charts, see the following:
(➤P.154 "11.8 Checking daily panel QC results")
11.5 Registering a panel and corresponding subset panels
Before you proceed to register a panel QC file, register a panel and its corresponding subset panels, then define
measurement conditions, compensation values, plots, and statistics items (all as baselines) for each subset panel by
running samples.
If there is any unmeasured subset panel under the panel, you cannot create a Panel QC file for the panel.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.96 "Chapter 10: 10.2 Registering a panel")
(➤P.98 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Registering subset panel analysis conditions while running a sample")
Note:
The radar charts and L-J charts of a panel QC file are displayed after the first daily panel QC is performed.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
137/314
11.6 Registering a panel QC file
1 Click [QC] - [Panel QC & Setup] in the screen transition area.
The following screen appears.
2 Click (Registration) in the panel QC file list area.
The following screen appears.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
138/314
3 Enter the [QC File Name] and select a panel from the [Panel] drop-down menu.
A list of subset panels is displayed as shown below.
If the panel has more than one corresponding subset panel, all of the subset panels are listed with on the left.
4 Enter the lot number for the QC file in the [Lot No.] field.
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
5 Confirm that the subset panels that need to be monitored by panel QC are
listed with on the left.
If there is a subset panel that does not need to be included in the panel QC, clear the checkbox.
Only the subset panels with are measured and monitored in daily panel QC.
6 Double-click the row to activate the subset panel you want to configure.
is shown in the [Active] column.
If there are multiple subset panels, each subset panel needs to be configured respectively.
7 Enter the expiration date for the QC material in the [Expiration Date] field.
Click and select the expiration date of the QC material. You can also enter the date manually. You can delete
the date by clicking . If the entered expiration date has already passed, [Exp. Date] in the subset panel list is
shown in red.
You can also enter comments in the [Comment] field (optional).
Note:
If there are any unmeasured subset panels under the panel, the panel name does not appear in the dropdown
menu and you cannot select it.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
139/314
8 Select whether to apply QC results to measurement conditions.
Select the option from the drop-down menu below.
⏺ If you select [Not apply] or [Depends on Daily QC results]
Go to step 10.
⏺ If you select [Apply Daily QC results]
The [Select] button is activated. Go to step 9.
[Not apply] Select if you do not want to apply daily panel QC results to the measurement
conditions.
[Apply Daily QC
results]
Select if you want to apply daily panel QC results to the measurement conditions.
[Depends on Daily QC
results]
Select if you want to determine whether to apply to the measurement conditions
based on the daily panel QC results.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
140/314
9 If needed, select additional subset panels to apply QC results.
1 Click [Select].
The following dialog box appears.
The panel/subset panels that were measured under the same measurement conditions (i.e., the selected
channels and height/area/width) as the current subset panel are displayed in the [Panel List] and [Subset
Panel List] areas.
2 If needed, select additional subset panels to apply QC results.
• Select the desired panel and check [Gain/PMT] and/or [Comp.] of the subset panels.
• Unchecked items are not applied.
3 Click [Apply].
The changes are reflected in the
[Current setting list] area.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
141/314
4 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes.
The selected subset panel information is reflected in the [QC result to Measurement Setting] area of the
[QC File Registration / Setup] screen.
10 Set the baseline.
You can choose required QC items from the following 4 tabs:
• [Gain/PMT] (➤P.141 "⏺ Setting the Gain/PMT value as a QC item")
• [Compensation] (➤P.143 "⏺ Setting the compensation values as a QC item")
• [Statistics] (➤P.144 "⏺ Setting a statistics value as a QC item")
• [Laser] (➤P.146 "⏺ Setting the laser value as a QC item")
⏺ Setting the Gain/PMT value as a QC item
1 Click the [Gain/PMT] tab.
The screen below is displayed.
Channel list The channels and Gain/PMT values of the subset panel are displayed
automatically.
[Channel] By default, the channels used for the plots of the subset panel are displayed.
Channels to be monitored by the panel QC process can be added or deleted.
[H/A/W] You can select a parameter to be managed for each channel.
[H], [A], and [W] indicate Height, Area, and Width, respectively.
Channel list
Histogram/Plot area
Parent gate and limit area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
142/314
2 Add or delete channels as necessary.
• To add a row, click [Add]. If no row can be added, [Add] is disabled.
• To change the channel and/or parameter of a newly added row, click the [Channel] or [H/A/W] column
and change it as needed.
• To delete a row, select it and click [Delete].
3 Click the row you want to change and configure the following settings:
• [Parent Gate]: Select the parent gate from the drop-down menu.
• [Limit]: Select the limit value from the drop-down menu. If you select [User Setting], enter the
[Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
• [Histogram / Plot]: Drag the marker gate to set the peak range for the population you want to manage.
Repeat this step to configure all channels you want to manage.
[Lower Limit]/
[Upper Limit]
If you selected [User Setting] or [User Value] for [Limit], the configured limit values
are displayed.
[Target] Displays the Gain/PMT values from when the subset panel master was last saved.
This value cannot be changed.
[Add] Click to add a channel to the lowermost row. If there are no channels that can be
added, the button cannot be clicked.
[Delete] Click to delete the selected row.
Parent gate and limit
area
Select a desired parent gate and the limit for each channel.
[Parent Gate] Select the parent gate from the drop-down menu.
[Limit] Select the upper and lower limit setting from the drop-down menu. You can select
[±2SD], [±3SD], [User Setting], or [User Value]. The default setting is [±2SD].
[Limit Input] If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the lower and upper limit ranges in
the field to the right of the [-] and [+] marks respectively. By default, a numerical
value that is 10 % of the target value is displayed. Check the values and edit them
if necessary.
If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target values
in the fields next to the [~] mark. Enter the lower limit value in the leftmost entry
field and the upper limit value in the rightmost entry field. If you enter a lower/upper
limit value higher/lower than the target value, the field will be marked in red, and
you cannot save the setting.
Histogram/Plot area Displays particle data (number of events) of the selected channel as a histogram.
No histogram is displayed if multiple channels are selected.
[Histogram / Plot] Define the peak range for the population you want to manage by dragging the
marker gate.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
143/314
⏺ Setting the compensation values as a QC item
1 Click the [Compensation] tab.
The screen below is displayed.
Note:
If compensation values are set as panel QC items to be monitored or adjusted automatically, an automatic
compensation must be performed when registering the panel/subset panel master.
For more details, see the following:
(➤P.99 "Chapter 10: 10.3 Registering subset panel analysis conditions while running a sample", step 10)
Compensation matrix The channels defined in the panel master’s automatic compensation and the
calculated spillover values are displayed.
Select the checkbox next to the parameter type ([Area] or [Height]) to include all
compensation values for QC items. Clearing the checkbox excludes all
compensation values from QC items.
Limit setting area Define the limit range for each channel.
[Limit] Select the upper and lower limit setting from the drop-down menu. You can select
[±2SD], [±3SD], [User Setting], or [User Value]. The default setting is [±2SD].
[Limit Input] If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the lower and upper limit ranges in
the field to the right of the [-] and [+] marks respectively. By default, a numerical
value that is 10 % of the target value is displayed. Check the values and edit them
if necessary.
If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target values
in the fields next to the [~] mark. Enter the lower limit value in the leftmost entry
field and the upper limit value in the rightmost entry field. If you enter a lower/upper
limit value higher/lower than the target value, the field will be marked in red, and
you cannot save the setting.
Histogram/Plot area Displays the density plot for FSC/SSC and the histogram plot for the channel in
the column of the selected cell in the compensation matrix.
For details on the compensation matrix, see the following:
(➤P.194 "Chapter 13: ⏺ Performing manual compensation")
Compensation matrix
Histogram/Plot area
Limit setting area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
144/314
2 Click the cell you want to configure in the compensation matrix.
The background color of the selected cell changes to blue, and a plot is displayed in the plot area.
3 Select a limit value from the [Limit] drop-down menu.
If you selected [User Setting], enter the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
4 Repeat sub-steps 2 and 3 to configure all the cells in the compensation
matrix.
⏺ Setting a statistics value as a QC item
1 Click the [Statistics] tab.
The screen below is displayed.
Statistics list Displays statistics items and the values for all gates in the subset panel.
[Gate] Displays the names of all gates in the subset panel.
[Statistics] Displays the statistics items for all gates in the subset panel.
[Lower Limit]/
[Upper Limit]
If you selected [User Setting] or [User Value] for [Limit], the configured limit values
are displayed.
[Target] Displays the statistics values for all gates in the subset panel.
[Edit] Click to display a dialog box that allows you to select or deselect a statistics item.
Limit setting area Define the limit range for each statistics value.
[Limit] Select the upper and lower limit settings from the drop-down menu. You can select
[±2SD], [±3SD], [User Setting], or [User Value]. The default setting is [±2SD].
Statistics list
Histogram/Plot area
Limit setting area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
145/314
2 If you want to select management items individually, click [Edit].
The [Select Statistics Item] dialog box is displayed.
3 If there is any item you want to remove from management, clear the checkboxes
and click [OK].
4 Click the row you want to configure in the statistics list.
The background color of the selected row changes to blue, and a plot is displayed in the histogram/plot
area.
5 Select a limit value from the [Limit] drop-down menu.
If you select [User Setting], enter the [Upper Limit] and [Lower Limit].
6 Repeat sub-steps 4 and 5 to configure all the rows in the statistics list.
[Limit Input] If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the lower and upper limit ranges in
the field to the right of the [-] and [+] marks respectively. By default, a numerical
value that is 10 % of the target value is displayed. Check the values and edit them
if necessary.
If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target values
in the fields next to the [~] mark. Enter the lower limit value in the leftmost entry
field and the upper limit value in the rightmost entry field. If you enter a lower/upper
limit value higher/lower than the target value, the field will be marked in red, and
you cannot save the setting.
Histogram/Plot area Displays the plot or histogram of FSC/SSC for the gate in the selected row. If
multiple rows are selected, no plot or histogram is displayed.
[Gate Name] Displays a tree-structure list of subset panel gates.
Statistics list Displays the statistics items and the values that are calculated in the subset panel.
Histogram/Plot area Displays a plot for the gate in the selected row.
Statistics list Histogram/Plot area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
146/314
11 If the panel has more than one subset panel, repeat steps 6 to 10.
12 Click [OK].
The panel QC file is registered.
⏺ Setting the laser value as a QC item
1 Click the [Laser] tab.
The screen below is displayed.
List of laser items Automatically displays the mA and mW values for each laser.
[Laser] Displays the laser items enabled on the subset panel. Laser items to be monitored
by the panel QC process can be added or deleted.
[mA/mW] You can select either [mA] or [mW].
[Lower Limit]/
[Upper Limit]
Displays the limit values for the selected laser item.
[Target] [mA]: If [Limit] is set to [User Setting], displays the laser value when the subset
panel was measured.
If [Limit] is set to [User Value], displays the laser value when instrument startup
completed.
[mW]: Displays the fixed value corresponding to the laser value (488 nm: 90.0;
638 nm: 50.0; 405 nm: 50.0). If [mA] is 0, [mW] is also displayed as 0.
[Add] Click to add a laser item to the lowermost row. If there are no laser items that can
be added, the button cannot be clicked.
[Delete] Click to delete the selected row.
Limit setting area
[Limit] Select the upper and lower limit value settings from the drop-down menu. You can
select [User Setting] or [User Value].
List of laser items Limit setting area
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
147/314
2 Add or delete laser items as necessary.
• To add a row, click [Add]. If no row can be added, [Add] is disabled.
• To change the laser item of a newly added row, click the row and change it as needed.
• To delete a row, select it and click [Delete].
3 Click the row you want to change and configure the following settings:
• [Limit]: Select the limit value from the drop-down menu.
• [Limit input]: Change the value as necessary.
Repeat this step to configure all the laser items you want to manage.
11.7 Performing daily panel QC
1 Click [QC] - [Panel QC & Setup] in the screen transition area.
The following screen appears.
2 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [AutoLoader]. If the
mode is set to [Manual], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [AutoLoader].
[Limit Input] If you selected [User Setting] for [Limit], enter the lower and upper limit range in
the fields to the right of the [-] and [+] marks. By default, a numerical value that is
10 % of the target value is displayed. Check the values and edit them if necessary.
If you selected [User Value] for [Limit], enter the lower/upper limit and target
values in the fields next to the [~] mark. Enter the lower limit value in the leftmost
entry field and the upper limit value in the rightmost entry field. If you enter a lower/
upper limit value higher/lower than the target value, the field will be marked in red,
and you cannot save the setting.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
148/314
3 Select panel QC file and click (Daily QC).
The [Daily QC] dialog box appears.
[Rotor No.] Enter the 4-digit number on the rotor barcode label.
[Rotor Type] Displays the rotor type for the entered rotor number.
[Start] Click to start the QC run by auto loader.
[QC File Name] Displays the QC file name.
[Panel Name] Displays the panel name registered in the QC file.
[Lot No.] Displays the lot number for the QC file.
[Subset Panel] Displays information about the subset panels registered in the QC file.
If the panel has multiple subset panels, the first subset panel is activated when
starting the daily panel QC. Once the run for the active subset panel is completed,
automatically moves to the next subset panel.
The screen displays information about the active subset panel.
[Expiration Date] Displays the expiration date of the QC material.
[Comment] Displays comments about the QC material.
[Rotor Pos. Information] Displays information about the tube loaded at each position in the rotor.
[Pos.] Displays the position number of the tube in the rotor.
[Tube] Displays information about the tube.
[Gain/PMT] Baseline settings are displayed in the [Item] and [Target] columns based on the
selected limit setting. Daily panel QC results are displayed in the [Value] column.
[Compensation] Baseline settings are displayed in the [Item] and [Target] columns based on the
selected limit setting. Daily panel QC results are displayed in the [Value] column.
[Statistics] Baseline settings are displayed in the [Item] and [Target] columns based on the
selected limit setting. Daily panel QC results are displayed in the [Value] column.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
149/314
4 Enter the 4-digit rotor number in the [Rotor No.] for the active subset panel.
The rotor type for the entered rotor number is displayed, and the [Start] button becomes active.
5 Prepare the required sample tubes for the active subset panel, and place them
in the rotor as described in [Rotor Pos. Information].
For each sample tube to be run for auto-compensation, prepare 200 μL of single-stained sample regardless of
the measurement conditions of the subset panel.
6 Place the rotor in the auto loader.
For more information on how to place the rotor in the auto loader, see the following:
(➤P.168 "Chapter 12: 12.3.1 Running samples with the auto loader (auto loader analysis)", steps 2 and 3, and
steps 6 to 9.)
7 Click [Start] at the upper right of the [Daily QC] dialog box.
Auto loader measurement starts.
Once the measurement of the active subset panel is complete:
⏺ When [Not apply] or [Apply Daily QC results] is selected in [QC result to
Measurement Setting]
• If the panel has only one subset panel, or the measurement was for the last subset panel, the [OK] button at
the lower right becomes active.
Click [OK] and go to step 10.
• If the panel has any unmeasured subset panels, the [Next] button appears at the upper right of the dialog box.
Click [Next], then the in the [Active] column moves to the next subset panel.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the remaining subset panels.
⏺ When [Depends on Daily QC results] is selected in [QC result to
Measurement Setting]
Go to step 8.
[Laser] Baseline settings are displayed in the [Item] and [Target] columns based on the
selected limit setting. Daily panel QC results are displayed in the [Value] column.
[Upper Limit] Displays the upper limit for the selected item.
[Lower Limit] Displays the lower limit for the selected item.
Caution
Place each sample tube in the correct position of the rotor so that it matches the [Rotor Pos. Information].
There is a risk of incorrect QC data if the placement is incorrect.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
150/314
8 Select whether to apply QC results to measurement conditions.
The following dialog box appears.
The available options are as follows:
[Not apply] Select if you do not want to apply daily panel QC results to the measurement
conditions for the subsequent workitems to be created.
[Apply Daily QC
results]
Select if you want to apply daily panel QC results to the measurement conditions
for the subsequent workitems to be created until the instrument is turned off.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
151/314
⏺ If you select [Not apply]
Click [OK] and the dialog box closes.
• If the panel has only one subset panel, or the measurement was for the last subset panel, the [OK] button at
the lower right of the [Daily QC] dialog box becomes active.
Click [OK] and go to step 10.
• If the panel has any unmeasured subset panels, the [Next] button appears at the upper right of the dialog box.
Click [Next], then the in the [Active] column moves to the next subset panel.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the remaining subset panels.
⏺ If you select [Apply Daily QC results]
The [Select] button is activated. Go to step 9.
9 If needed, select additional subset panels to apply QC results.
1 Click [Select].
The following dialog box appears.
The panel/subset panels that were measured under the same measurement conditions (i.e., the selected
channels and height/area/width) as the current subset panel are displayed in the [Panel List] and [Subset
Panel List] areas.
2 If needed, select additional subset panels to apply QC results.
• Select the desired panel and check [Gain/PMT] and/or [Comp.] of the subset panel as needed.
• Unchecked items are not applied.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
152/314
3 Click [Apply].
The changes are reflected in the
[Current setting list] area.
4 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes.
The selected subset panel information
is reflected in the [Select QC Set up or
Panel QC] dialog box.
5 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes.
• If the panel has only one subset panel, or the measurement was for the last subset panel, the [OK] button
at the lower right of the [Daily QC] dialog box becomes active.
Click [OK] and go to step 10.
• If the panel has any unmeasured subset panels, the [Next] button appears at the upper right of the dialog
box.
Click [Next], then the in the [Active] column moves to the next subset panel.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 for the remaining subset panels.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
153/314
10 Check the QC results with radar charts, L-J charts, and plots.
If the upper or lower limit has been exceeded, the value will be shown in red.
Note:
Measurement of all the subset panels under the panel QC file must be completed. If measurement of any
of the subset panels is not completed, the QC results for the panel QC file cannot be obtained.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
154/314
11.8 Checking daily panel QC results
In the QC charts area, you can check the pass/fail status of daily panel QC results run against the baselines of a
selected panel QC file.
11.8.1 Radar charts
The most recent daily panel QC results of the selected subset panel of the panel QC file are displayed in radar
charts.
For example, the chart in the upper left corner
displays the data points of the following four
parameters.
• SSC-H_PMT
• FSC-H_Gain
• FL1-A_PMT
• FL2-A_PMT
Item Displays the name of each parameter. Any parameter exceeding the limit will be
highlighted in red.
Lower limit Indicates the lower limit of the parameter.
Upper limit Indicates the upper limit of the parameter.
Target Indicates the target of the parameter.
Data points Indicates the data points from the selected subset panel of the panel QC file.
Data points
Target
Upper limit Lower limit
Radar chart
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
155/314
11.8.2 L-J charts
L-J charts graphically summarize the [Pass]/[Fail] status of the daily panel QC results against upper/lower limits
over time, as well as target values.
⏺ Command buttons area
Note:
• Radar charts are displayed after the first daily panel QC is performed for the selected panel QC file.
• Any point exceeding the upper or lower limit is marked with a red "X".
(Vial) Click to display a vial line to indicate that the vial was replaced.
For details on vial lines, see the following:
(➤P.160 "11.8.5 Displaying the vial line")
(Manage) Click to exclude data points for a particular panel QC run from QC data
management. Select the desired QC data with the cursor, and choose whether or
not the data points of the run are to be managed.
(Comment) Click to add comments on a cursor data.
For details on cursor data, see the following:
(➤P.159 "11.8.4 Managing panel QC data")
Chart display area (left)
Command buttons area
Chart display area (right)
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
156/314
⏺ Chart display area (left)
⏺ Chart display area (right)
The results are plotted by time and displayed in the chart area as a broken-line graph.
Each data point on the chart corresponds to a single daily panel QC run and the type of points indicates
whether the result is within the limit (Pass) or outside the limits (Fail). It also indicates whether the data points
of a particular run are used for panel QC management.
[Item Data] Displays the names of panel QC parameters and the values from the daily panel QC
run selected by the cursor. When it is outside the limits, the item is highlighted in red.
[UL] Displays the upper limit value based on the selected limit setting.
[Target] If [User Setting] is applied for the range of limit, the target value from the baseline
setup is displayed.
If [±2SD] or [±3SD] is selected, the target value is calculated as follows:
- When the number of data point is 1, the target will be the value of the data point.
(The result will be [Pass].)
- When the number of data points is 2, the target will be the value of the first data
point. (If the value of the second data point is within the range of the first value ± 1
minimum significant digit, the result will be [Pass].)
- When the number of data points is 3 or more, the target will be the mean value of
the previous data points after the last baseline setup or QC file setting.
[LL] Displays the lower limit value based on the selected limit setting.
Data points Indicates that the QC value is within the upper and lower limits.
Indicates that the QC value is outside the upper or lower limit.
Vial line
Comment display area
Comment marks
Data points
Cursor
Date
Baseline
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
157/314
Indicates that the data point is excluded from
management. The data point that is excluded from
management is not connected to the line, as shown on
the right.
Data that is excluded from management is shown in this way even if outside
the upper and lower limits.
For details on data that is excluded from management, see the following:
(➤P.159 "11.8.4 Managing panel QC data")
BASE line Indicates that the baseline was set.
If any information on a QC file is changed, the BASE line is added at the
point changed.
Vial line Indicates that the vial was changed to a new vial.
Comment display
area
Displays comments on the cursor data.
Comment marks Displayed when there are comments on the QC result.
To enter comments, see the following:
(➤P.159 "11.8.4 Managing panel QC data")
Indicates comments for the cursor data.
The comments appear in the comment display area.
Indicates comments for data other than cursor data.
Cursor Used to select a QC result for management.
For details about management, see the following:
(➤P.159 "11.8.4 Managing panel QC data")
The cursor is on the most recent QC results by default when the L-J charts
are displayed for the first time.
You can move the cursor to the results of the date/time you want to manage.
Date Displays the date and time of the selected QC run.
Note:
• Once the number of data points of a QC item reaches 200, each new data point will delete the oldest
data point.
• If all the data points currently displayed on the chart are excluded from QC management, data points
outside the displayed area which are under management are connected.
Current display range
Lines are connected
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
158/314
11.8.3 Displaying daily panel QC results
Click the [Plots]/[QCReports]/[L-J Charts]/[Hierarchy] tab to switch the display.
Move the cursor to a QC result on the L-J chart to display its plots on the [Plots] tab and QC report on the
[QCReports] tab.
[Size] Select the page size (A4 or letter) from the drop-down menu.
[Zoom] If you want to zoom in (maximize) the page view, click the upper icon (+Zoom).
If you want to zoom out (minimize) the page view, click the lower icon (-Zoom).
[Display PlotPages] Select this checkbox to display the plot page in the QC reports.
(Filter) Click the (Filter) icon to specify the range of dates for which to display
measurement results on the [L-J Charts] report. The range of dates being shown is
displayed to the right of the (Filter) icon.
Note:
Panel QC results can be printed and exported by clicking the options under the [XF-1600 File] tab.
For details on the [XF-1600 File] tab, see the following:
(➤P.179 "Chapter 13: 13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab")
QC results
(plots) in the
workarea
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
159/314
11.8.4 Managing panel QC data
You can select specific daily panel QC results by using the cursor in the QC chart to exclude data points from the
daily panel QC management or add comments for data points.
⏺ Excluding QC results from daily panel QC management
1 Move the cursor to the results of the date/time you want to exclude.
2 Click (Manage) in the command buttons area.
The data points are changed to regardless of whether they are within the limits ( ) or outside the limits
( ).
⏺ Adding comments to the results
1 Move the cursor to the results of the date/time you want to add comments to.
2 Click (Comment) in the command buttons area.
The following dialog box appears.
3 Click [OK].
Note:
• The excluded data points remain in the L-J charts even if they are out of management.
• If you want to include the results in management again, repeat the procedure.
[Comment] Comments can be added to the QC results selected by the cursor.
[None] Select this option if you do not want to add any comments to the selected data or
you want to delete comments added previously.
[Yes:] Select this option when you want to add comments. Up to 40 characters can be
entered in the field.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
160/314
11.8.5 Displaying the vial line
The vial line can be displayed on the L-J chart to indicate when the vial was changed.
1 Move the cursor to the first results of the date/time after changing to a new
vial.
2 Click (Vial) in the command buttons area.
The vial line appears to the left of the cursor data.
To clear the vial line, repeat the procedure.
11.8.6 Editing the most recent daily panel QC result
If you have not reconfigured the baseline after the most recent daily panel QC result, the gate position and plot
type can be changed. Measurement result will be reanalyzed after any change, which will be applied to the most
recent daily panel QC result. Changes are not applied to any daily QC results other than the most recent, nor to
the panel master.
This feature cannot be used by users with [Operator] user privilege.
1 Click the [Plots] tab in the workarea.
2 Select the gate you wish to edit and adjust its position.
When a gate is changed, (Gate edited) is displayed in the top right of the workarea.
3 Click [Statistics] – [Save] on the ribbon menu.
The changes will be saved and applied to the most recent daily panel QC result. Changes to the plot type are
not saved.
Note:
If the plot type is [Color] or [Density], you can right-click on the plot and change it to [Color] or [Density].
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
161/314
11.9 Managing panel QC files
⏺ Modifying
Select the panel QC file you want to modify in the [QC File] list and click (Edit QC File).
You can edit any items except the panel name.
⏺ Deleting
Select the panel QC file you want to delete in the [QC File] list and click (Delete).
A confirmation dialog box appears. Click [OK].
11.10 Backing up panel QC files
1 Select the panel QC file you want to save.
2 Click (Backup).
A dialog box on the right appears.
Information
After modifying the settings, make sure that you run a daily panel QC, then create a workitem that
implements the changes.
Note:
The time required to complete the deletion depends on the data size of the panel QC files.
For large files, the time may be several minutes. Before deleting panel QC files, make sure that this time is
available.
Chapter 11 Panel QC
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
162/314
3 Select the options you want to backup.
In addition to the two checked items to be backed up by default, you can select [Chart data] and [Panel data
which you wish to apply] if necessary.
The explanation for each message is as follows:
[Panel QC File]: Settings of the panel QC file
[Monitored panel]: The target panel master data
[Chart data]: Radar and L-J charts data of the panel QC file
[Panel data which you wish to apply]: Data of the panel master to which you selected to apply the QC data
4 Click [OK].
A dialog box appears prompting you to specify the file destination.
5 Specify the desired location.
If you want to create a new folder, click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box.
6 Click [OK].
The file is saved in the selected folder.
The default file name will be [PQCFile][Index][Panel Name][QC File Name].pqcf.
11.11 Restoring saved QC files
1 Click (Restore).
The [Open] dialog box appears.
2 Select the name of the files you want to restore.
3 Click [Open].
The QC file is restored.
The QC file restored is displayed at the bottom of the QC file list with the newly assigned [Index].
Note:
The time required to complete the backup depends on the data size of the QC files.
For large files, the time may be several minutes. Before backing up QC files, make sure that this time is
available.
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
163/314
Chapter 12 Running samples
12.1 Overview of measuring samples
Measurements are performed by this instrument in either manual analysis or auto loader analysis mode using
workitem information. The workitem can be manually or automatically registered before starting a run.
You can also run samples without a workitem to perform QC or register a panel/subset panel. Measurement
conditions can be changed before and during measurement. To change conditions, see the following:
(➤P.163 "12.2 Setting measurement conditions")
Perform preprocessing of the sample as needed.
For information on measurement conditions, see the following:
(➤P.89 "Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems")
12.1.1 Types of acquisition
The instrument supports the analysis modes below.
⏺ Manual analysis
In this analysis mode, sample tubes are loaded manually one at a time. Use it when you run a special or
urgent sample. This mode is also used to run samples to create/edit a panel/subset panel.
⏺ Auto loader analysis
In this analysis method, sample tubes are loaded into a rotor. Depending on the rotor’s specifications, either
12 or 24 tubes can be loaded at once.
12.2 Setting measurement conditions
Caution
• Make sure that samples are prepared using the correct reagents. Otherwise, inaccurate results will be
obtained.
• To ensure that the sample volume is sufficient for the measurement, prepare more than the selected
required volume. There is a risk of incorrect measurement results if the sample volume is insufficient.
Note:
• You can back up measurement condition settings to an external file after finishing the configuration
described in this section, then apply them to a different subset panel or an unmeasured workitem.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.181 "13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab ⏺[Backup]")
• If you already have a saved measurement condition file that you want to copy, you can restore it and
apply the settings to an existing subset panel or an unmeasured workitem.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.182 "13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab ⏺[Restore]")
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
164/314
12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions
Set the particle acquisition conditions in the measurement condition setting area.
• Channel settings
- Channels to be acquired, the name of each channel, and the parameters (height, area, or width)
- Threshold
- Trigger setting
- Gain/PMT voltage setting
• Flow rate
• Sample volume
• Laser ON/OFF (laser control)
1 Select the workitem or subset panel of the sample you want to run, and
activate it by clicking (Active).
The measurement condition setting area and the workarea will change for the active workitem or subset panel.
2 Click the [Settings] tab in the measurement condition setting area.
The screen on the right appears.
The screen shown on the right is displayed when
[Single display] has been selected for the [Display]
setting in the IPU settings.
Screen displays and operation vary when [Multidisplay]
is selected.
For further information on the [Display] settings, see
the following:
(➤P.240 "Chapter 15: 15.4.4 Display")
3 Select the desired condition for each item below.
Note:
• Only Threshold and Gain/PMT voltage values can also be changed during acquisition. The other
conditions cannot be changed once the acquisition begins.
• This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
[LOGIC] This defines the triggered logical condition. When more than one
parameter is listed, select either [OR] or [AND] to define the logical
condition to be triggered.
[OR] Signals must be equal to or greater than any one of the set threshold
values to be acquired.
[AND] Signals must be equal to or greater than all of the set threshold values to
be acquired.
[Settings] tab (when set to [Single display])
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
165/314
[Channel] Displays all available channels. Select the checkbox for the desired
channels.
If you select the respective checkbox on the left of each channel name, all
of the 3 parameters ([Height], [Area], and [Width]) are enabled at once. If
you want to enable one or two of them, select the checkboxes for the
[Height], [Area], and [Width] columns, respectively. Data is acquired for the
channels with the blue or selected checkboxes. If the checkbox is gray, no
data is acquired for the channel. Click again to disable the selection.
[Name] Set the name of each channel. You can enter up to 10 characters.
Duplicate channel names cannot be used.
[Height] Select the checkbox to enable [Height] measurement for all the channels at once.
Click again to disable [Height] measurement for all the channels at once.
[Area] Select the checkbox to enable [Area] measurement for all the channels at once.
Click again to disable [Area] measurement for all the channels at once.
[Width] Select the checkbox to enable [Width] measurement for all the channels at once.
Click again to disable [Width] measurement for all the channels at once.
[Threshold] This column defines the threshold value for events to be acquired.
Selecting the checkbox on the left includes the channel as the triggered
logical condition ([AND]). Enter a value from 1 to 2,500.
[Gain/PMT] For FSC (Gain), enter a value from 0 to 2,560. For SSC and FL
(Photomultiplier Voltage), enter a value from 0 to 1,100.
[Flow Rate] Click [High], [Middle], or [Low], and then select the desired flow rate from
the drop-down menu.
When [High] is selected:
• [90] (90 μL/min)
• [120] (120 μL/min)
When [Middle] is selected:
• [60] (60 μL/min)
• [30] (30 μL/min)
When [Low] is selected:
• [5] (5 μL/min)
[Volume] Select the required sample volume.
[Required volume select] The available options are [150], [250], [500], [1000], [1500], and [2000] μL.
By default, [250] μL is displayed.
• If a flow rate of [30] (30 μL/min) or [5] (5 μL/min) is selected, you cannot
select a volume between [500] and [2000] μL.
• When the selected volume is between [500] and [2000] μL, and the flow
rate has been changed to either [30] (30 μL/min) or [5] (5 μL/min), the
volume is automatically reset to [250] μL on the screen.
For more details on applicable flow rate and stop time, please see the
explanation for [Stop Time] in step 2 of "12.2.2 Setting stop conditions."
(➤P.166 "12.2.2 Setting stop conditions")
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
166/314
12.2.2 Setting stop conditions
Stop conditions allow you to specify when the collection of data will end.
This procedure cannot be performed while measurement is in progress. Display and set the desired workitem or
subset panel before measurement.
1 Select the workitem or subset panel you want to run, and activate it by
clicking (Active).
2 Click the [Stops] tab in the measurement condition setting area.
The screen on the right appears.
The screen shown on the right is
displayed when [Single display] has been
selected for the [Display] setting in the
IPU settings.
Screen displays and operation vary when
[Multi-display] is selected.
For further information on the [Display]
setting, see the following:
(➤P.240 "Chapter 15: 15.4.4 Display")
[Laser] Indicates the status of each laser. When lasers are powered on, each
button displays the laser color as follows:
• 488 nm (blue)*
• 638 nm (red)
• 405 nm (violet)
Before running a sample, set the ON/OFF status of each laser by clicking
the colored buttons. When the laser is powered off, the color changes to
gray and the corresponding channels are also disabled.
* The 488 nm (blue) laser cannot be turned OFF because it covers FSC/
SSC channels that are required for data acquisition, regardless of FL
channels selected.
Note:
This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
Note:
The measurement condition setting area and the workarea will change for the active workitem or subset
panel.
[Stops] tab (when set to [Single display])
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
167/314
12.2.3 Adding plots before running samples
If you want to check plots during acquisition, please add plots and gates as needed in the [Plots] tab of the
workarea before starting acquisition.
For details on adding plots in the workarea, see the following:
(➤P.188 "Chapter 13: 13.5.2 [Add Plot] group")
[Event Count] Select the [Stop Condition] checkbox for stopping acquisition when the
specified number of events has been collected within the specified gate.
[Stop Condition] The drop-down menu displays all gates that have been set for the sample.
If there are no gates created in the plots, only [Ungated] appears. Select
the gate you want to use as the stop condition.
[Event Count] The [Event Count] field allows you to enter a number between 1 and
5,000,000.
[Time] Select the [Stop Time] checkbox to stop acquisition when the specified
period of time has elapsed.
[Stop Time] The [Seconds] field allows you to enter a number between 5 and 1,800.
The maximum stop time (seconds) you can define depends on the
selected flow rate and required volume. For details, see the table below.
Both minimum and maximum stop times are automatically displayed next
to [Seconds], based on the selected flow rate and sample volume.
If you reselect either flow rate or required volume, these numbers
automatically reflect the latest conditions.
If the defined stop time does not match the range, it is automatically
adjusted to either minimum or maximum allowable seconds, displaying a
dialog box to inform of the change.
Information
If multiple stop conditions are selected, the acquisition ends when any one of the selected stop conditions
is met.
Note:
This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
Flow rate
Required volume (μL)
High Middle Low
120 90 60 30 5
2,000 904 1,240 1,800 n/a n/a
1,500 678 930 1,350 n/a n/a
1,000 452 620 900 n/a n/a
500 226 310 450 n/a n/a
250 113 155 225 210 300
150 68 93 135 200 300
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
168/314
12.2.4 Status checking and control during measurement
In the status area, you can check the status of acquisition and control measurement while measurement is in
progress.
For details on the status area, see the following:
(➤P.59 "Chapter 8: 8.6.2 Status area")
12.2.5 Settings that can be changed during measurement
If you are using the sample tube holder to run the sample, the following areas are enabled at the start of
acquisition, and you can adjust settings during acquisition:
• Threshold (➤P.164 "12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
• Gain/PMT (➤P.164 "12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
If any of the above settings are changed while particles are being acquired, data acquired up to that point will
be discarded.
You can also make the following changes in the workarea:
- Add plots, gates, and statistics tables
- Change plots, gates, and statistics tables*
- Perform a manual compensation
* If [Event Count] is selected as a stop condition, you can still change the gate selected as [Stop Condition], its
parent gate, and the plots which contain these gates, but cannot delete the gate or the plot containing the
gate.
In the above case:
- The run will be stopped when it meets the changed conditions.
- If the stop conditions are met immediately after the change has been made and the run has been stopped,
the number of acquired events will be displayed on the plot.
12.3 Running a sample
12.3.1 Running samples with the auto loader (auto loader analysis)
Note:
• The above settings cannot be changed if you are using the auto loader to run the samples.
• This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
Caution
Verify that measurement conditions are appropriate for running the samples.
There is a risk of inaccurate results and data analysis that requires additional measurement if the
conditions are not set properly.
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
169/314
1 (When the PS-10 connection is enabled) Make sure that the [PS-10] status is
green.
If the [PS-10] status is red, an error has occurred. Verify that the system is properly connected to the PS-10 and
that the PS-10 power turns on.
Also confirm whether the host computer connection is enabled. If not, patient information cannot be received
and generated in the workitems, and you will have to manually enter the information.
2 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [AutoLoader]. If the
mode is set to [Manual], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [AutoLoader].
3 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the auto loader analysis status indicator LED/
instrument status shown in the bottom left corner of the
IPU screen does not light green, wait until it does.
Note:
• When the XF-1600 is connected to the Sample Preparation System PS-10, the information on the rotor
preprocessed by the PS-10 can be transferred to the XF-1600, and the workitems are automatically
created to run the samples. When connecting the PS-10, configure settings on both the [PS-10] and
[Host Computer] screens under [IPU Settings] before performing measurements. For details, see the
following:
(➤P.252 "Chapter 15: 15.4.16 PS-10")
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
• If the system is not connected to the PS-10, workitems must be registered before running the samples,
except when you perform auto-compensation or panel QC using the auto loader. For details, see the
following:
(➤P.100 "Chapter 10: 10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)")
Auto loader analysis
status indicator LED
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
170/314
4 Prepare the rotor.
If connected to the PS-10, retrieve a rotor for which pre-processing has completed from the PS-10.
If not connected to the PS-10, prepare a rotor into which the tubes to be measured have been loaded. When
using a tube that does not fit the diameter of the rotor adapter, remove the adapter.
5 (If not connected to the PS-10) Make sure that the workitems for the tubes in
the rotor have been registered.
For details on registering a workitem in the worklist, see the following:
(➤P.100 "Chapter 10: 10.4.1 Registering a workitem in the worklist (for auto loader analysis)")
6 (If not connected to the PS-10) Make sure that the position of each sample
tube on the rotor matches the rotor position registered in the workitem.
7 Open the auto loader.
Caution
Place each sample tube in the correct position of the rotor so that it matches the [Rotor Position] displayed
on the worklist.
There is a risk of incorrect data if the placement is incorrect.
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
171/314
8 Verify that the pedestal is oriented properly.
An error message will be displayed at the start of
aspiration if the pedestal is not positioned in the
proper orientation.
9 Install the rotor as shown in the figure.
⏺ If using a fixed rotor
Orient the white line to match the
position shown in the figure on the
right.
The rotor will click into place when
properly positioned.
⏺ If using a swing-out rotor
Position the rotor so that the
protrusions on the back fit into the
grooves on the pedestal. The rotor will
click into place when properly
positioned.
Make sure that the placement of
position 1 and the barcode label
matches the figure on the right.
Top view
If using a fixed rotor
Top view Groove
White line
If using a swing-out rotor
Position 1
Top view Groove
Barcode
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
172/314
10 Close the auto loader.
11 Click (Start) in the status area.
Alternatively, you can press the auto loader analysis start switch on the instrument.
The [Workitem List(Auto Loader)] dialog box appears.
Rotor information Displays the rotor information.
[Rotor No.] Displays the 4-digit number on the rotor barcode label.
[Rotor Type] Displays the rotor type.
Rotor
information
Order
information by
register type
Workitem
information for
the selected
order
Register type
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
173/314
12 Select the order for the rotor in the auto loader.
Order information by register
type
Displays the register type, the register user information, and the date and
time of the registration/last update for the rotor ID/type displayed in the
rotor information area.
[Info.] Displays the type of workitem registration.
[P]: A workitem automatically created from data received from the PS-10
[C]: A workitem manually created on the workitem registration screen using
data received from the host computer
[M]: A workitem manually created on the workitem registration screen by
entering workitem information
[Registered User] Displays the logon name of the user who registered the workitems for the
order.
[Role] Displays the role of the user.
[Register Date] Displays the registration date and time for the order.
[Last Update Date] Displays the date and time last updated for the order.
Workitem information for the
selected order
Displays the workitems of the selected order. If [Info.] for the order is [P],
the workitems are automatically created.
[Status] Before the run starts, [Unmeasured] is displayed for all workitems. The
status changes to [Measured] after the measurement of the tube is
complete.
[Rotor Position] Displays the rotor position of the tube.
[Date measured] Displays the measuring date of the sample.
[Primary ID] Displays the primary ID of the tube.
[Secondary ID] Displays the secondary ID of the tube.
[Panel Name] Displays the panel name for the workitem.
[Subset Panel Name] Displays the subset panel name for the workitem.
[Register Date] Displays the registered date of the workitem.
[Last Update Date] Displays the date and time the workitem was last updated.
[Role] Displays the role of the user currently logging-in.
[Login User] Displays the name of the user currently logging-in.
[Order ID] Displays the ID of the analysis order.
[Order Name] Displays the name of the analysis order.
[Reagent ID] Displays the reagent ID.
[Reagent Name] Displays the reagent name.
[Patient ID] Displays the patient's ID.
[Patient Name] Displays the name of the patient (last name, first name).
[Patient Gender] Displays the patient's gender.
[Patient Date of Birth] Displays the patient's date of birth.
[Patient Comment] Displays comments about the patient.
[Comment] Displays comments about the workitem.
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
174/314
13 Click [OK].
Measurement starts. During analysis, the auto loader analysis status indicator LED blinks green.
If you wish to measure an urgent sample during auto loader measurement:
Press the mode switch to pause auto loader measurement and switch to manual measurement once
measurement of the sample tube currently being measured is complete.
Then create an urgent sample workitem and measure it manually.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.175 "Chapter 12: 12.3.2 Running a sample with the sample tube holder (manual analysis)", step 4.)
Press the mode switch* once measurement of the urgent sample is complete to resume auto loader
measurement starting with the next unmeasured sample tube.
* Close any other dialog boxes being displayed and then press the mode switch while the worklist tab on the
main screen is selected.
If you press the mode switch without first selecting the worklist tab, a warning alarm will sound, and the
measurement mode will not switch to auto loader measurement.
14 Verify that all measurement is complete.
You can check that measurement has been completed using the following method.
• The [Status] column of the workitem in the worklist displays [Measured], indicating the acquisition is complete.
• The instrument status indicated by the auto loader analysis status indicator LED (lower left corner of the IPU
screen) is lit green.
15 Open the auto loader and remove the rotor.
12.3.2 Running a sample with the sample tube holder (manual analysis)
1 Make sure that a workitem or subset panel for the sample to be measured is
registered.
For details on registering a workitem or subset panel, see the following:
(➤P.100 "Chapter 10: 10.4 Registering a workitem in the worklist")
2 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [Manual]. If the mode is
set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
Note:
If there is less than 50 GB of available space on the hard disk drive, a warning dialog box will be displayed
at the start of measurement.
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
175/314
3 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the analysis status LED/instrument status shown in the
bottom left corner of the IPU screen does not light green,
wait until it does.
4 Select the workitem or subset panel of the sample you want to run, and
activate it by clicking (Active).
This changes the measurement condition setting area and the workarea for the sample.
Caution
Verify that measurement conditions are appropriate for running the sample.
There is a risk of inaccurate results and data analysis that require additional measurement if the conditions
are not set properly.
Note:
The instrument acquires data for the active workitem or subset panel.
Analysis status
indicator LED
Chapter 12 Running samples
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
176/314
5 Mix the sample by vortexing.
6 Place the sample tube in the sample tube holder.
Make sure that the sample tube is uncapped.
⏺ Placing a regular sample tube
Place a regular sample tube in the regular sample tube
position at the front of the sample tube holder.
⏺ Placing a micro collection tube
Place the micro collection tube in the micro collection tube
position at the back of the sample tube holder.
7 Click (Start) in the status area.
Alternatively, you can press the manual analysis start switch on the instrument.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer and aspiration begins. During acquisition, the status indicator
LED blinks green.
When aspiration finishes, the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
8 Remove the sample tube.
Note:
• If there is less than 50 GB of available space on the hard disk drive, a warning dialog box will be
displayed at the start of measurement.
• You can check that measurement has been completed using the following method.
- If you are running the sample for a workitem, the [Status] column of the workitem in the worklist
displays [Measured], indicating the acquisition is complete.
- The instrument status indicated by the measurement status LED (lower left corner of the IPU screen) is
lit green.
Note:
If you measured the sample for a workitem making changes on existing settings of the subset panel for
optimization, and you want to apply the new settings, you can overwrite the subset panel information by
clicking (Save Subset Panel Master) in the worklist commands.
For more details, see the following:
(➤P.124 "Chapter 10: 10.19 Updating the subset panel master")
Regular sample
tube holder
Micro collection
tube holder
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
177/314
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
13.1 Overview
During analysis, recorded data is displayed in plots, while gates are used to define populations of interest. This
chapter provides an overview of data analysis with the XF-1600.
The analysis area consists of the ribbon menu and the workarea. In the workarea, results (such as plots, gates,
selected statistics and parameters) are displayed and analyzed in the [Plots] tab. You can also see the gate hierarchy
and statistics data in the [Hierarchy] tab. A report can then be created in the [Reports] tab, by using the commands in
the ribbon menu.
Analysis area
Ribbon menu
Workarea
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
178/314
13.2 Workarea
The workarea contains the following 3 tabs:
• [Plots] tab
Plots, gates, and statistics tables can be added to the workarea and can be analyzed or modified in this area.
For more details, see the following:
For adding plots and gates: (➤P.183 "13.5 [Home] tab")
For defining axis scales of plots: (➤P.191 "13.6 [View] tab")
For adding statistics tables: (➤P.203 "13.8 [Statistics] tab")
• [Reports] tab
You can create a page-based report using commands in the [Report] tab of the ribbon menu. The [Reports]
tab allows you to add and set up report pages, insert objects and text into the report, and edit and organize the
objects in the report. The reports are displayed in the [Reports] tab of the workarea.
For more details, see the following:
(➤P.209 "Chapter 14: 14.1 Creating a report")
• [Hierarchy] tab
You can see the gate hierarchy with the statistics data of all the plots of the active workitem on this page.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.207 "13.9 [Hierarchy] tab")
An error icon appears in the workarea for the workitem in which an error occurred.
Hover the cursor over the error icon to display the error messages.
If multiple errors have occurred, all error messages are shown.
For more information on errors also shown in the worklist, see the following:
(➤P.92 "10.1.1 [Worklist] tab ⏺Worklist")
Workarea
Error icon
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
179/314
13.3 Ribbon menu
The ribbon menu is the area at the top of the analysis area that presents an easy-to-browse set of main commands.
The ribbon menu is organized into a set of tabs which represent the main functionality groups of the software.
13.4 [XF-1600 File] tab
The [XF-1600 File] tab contains exporting, printing, backup, and restoring options.
⏺ [Export]
Click the button to select from the options for exporting plots, statistics data, or reports currently displayed in
the workarea.
[Export Plot(s) As Image File] Select this option to export all the plots as image files. The plot image
format is set to PNG.
When you click the button, the [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.
Select the desired location or create a new folder to save the Image files,
then click [OK].
This option is disabled if an unmeasured workitem or subset panel is
activated.
Ribbon menu
[XF-1600 File] tab
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
180/314
⏺ [Print]
Click the button to print the report currently displayed in the workarea. For details on creating reports, see the
following:
(➤P.211 "Chapter 14: 14.1.3 Creating a report")
[Export Statistics As CSV] Select this option to export the statistics data of all the statistics tables as a
CSV file.
When you click the button, the [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.
Select the desired location or create a new folder to save the statistics
data, then click [OK].
This option is disabled if an unmeasured workitem or subset panel is
activated.
Information
The statistics data exported in CSV format is for research use only, and cannot be used for diagnostic
procedures, as indicated in the header of the file.
[Export Report As PDF] Select this option to export the report as a PDF file.
When you click the button, the [Save As] dialog box appears. Select the
desired location, enter a file name, and click [Save].
If the selected workitem for the report is not validated, this button is
disabled.
[Export L-J Charts As PDF] Select this option on the QC screen to export the L-J chart as a PDF file.
When you click the button, the [Save As] dialog box appears. Select the
desired location, enter a file name, and click [Save].
This option is disabled if an unmeasured workitem or subset panel is
activated.
[Print Report] Select this option to print the report. If the selected workitem for the report
is not validated, this button is disabled.
[Print L-J Charts] Select this option on the QC screen to print the L-J chart. This option is
disabled if an unmeasured workitem or subset panel is activated.
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
181/314
⏺ [Backup]
Click the button to back up the report template, compensation file, or measurement condition file of the active
item currently displayed in the workarea.
[Backup Report Template] Select this option to back up a report template.
When you click the button, the [Browse For Folder] dialog box appears.
Select the desired location or create a new folder to save the backup file of
the report template.
Click [OK]. The [Backup] dialog box appears prompting you to enter a
password for restoring the data and the file name. After entering the
information, click [OK] again to proceed.
For more information on creating reports, see the following:
(➤P.209 "Chapter 14 Creating reports")
[Backup Compensation File] Select this option to back up compensation settings.
When you click the button, the [Save as] dialog box appears. Select the
desired location, enter a file name, and click [Save].
The file extension is ".compensation".
[Backup Measurement
Condition File]
Select this option to back up the measurement condition settings of an
active subset panel or workitem currently displayed on the screen.
When you click the button, the [Save as] dialog box appears. Select the
desired location, enter a file name, and click [Save].
The file extension is ".meas".
The settings that can be saved are as follows:
- Acquisition conditions (except the name of each channel)
- Stop conditions
- Compensation
For details, see the following:
(➤P.164 "12.2.1 Setting acquisition conditions")
(➤P.166 "12.2.2 Setting stop conditions")
(➤P.193 "13.7 [Compensation] tab")
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
182/314
⏺ [Restore]
Click the button to restore a report template, compensation file, or measurement condition file from the backup
file.
* Operation not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
[Restore Report Template]* Select this option to restore a report template.
When you click the button, a confirmation dialog box appears. If you click
[Yes], the [Open] dialog box appears. Select the location where the report
template you want to restore is saved and click [Open].
The [Restore] dialog box appears prompting you to enter the password
you set when backing up the report template. Enter the password and click
[OK].
For more information on creating reports, see the following:
(➤P.209 "Chapter 14 Creating reports")
[Restore Compensation File]* Select this option to restore compensation settings.
When you click the button, the [Open] dialog box appears. Select the file
you want to restore and click [Open].
[Restore Measurement
Condition File]*
Select this option to restore measurement condition settings and apply
them to an active subset panel or unmeasured workitem currently
displayed on the screen.
When you click the button, the [Open] dialog box appears. Select the file
you want to restore and click [Open].
This button is enabled only when a subset panel or an unmeasured
workitem is activated.
When you restore a measurement condition file that sets a specific gate as
a stop condition, confirm that analysis conditions, including the plots and
gate nomenclature in the workarea, are correct before analyzing the
sample.
For more information on measurement conditions that can be restored,
see the following:
(➤P.181 "⏺ [Backup]")
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
183/314
13.5 [Home] tab
The [Home] tab provides controls for adding plots and creating/editing gates associated with a workitem or subset
panel.
The buttons are enabled only when the workitem or subset panel is active.
13.5.1 [Gate] group
The [Gate] group contains controls for creating and editing gates.
Gates allow you to identify and analyze populations of interest by isolating a region in a selected plot. They can
also be used to limit the number of events collected.
The types of gates available are [Rectangular], [Polygon], [Ellipsoid], [Marker], [Quadrant], [S-Quadrant], and
[Boolean].
With gating tools, you can also change the color of a population, set the gate hierarchy, or create gates based
on Boolean operators (i.e. derived gates) by combining already defined gates.
You can create a maximum of 50 gates per workarea. Once this number is reached, a new gate cannot be
created.
Note:
This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
Note:
• You can also right-click on a plot and click (Gate) to quickly access the tool for making changes on
the plot.
• You cannot add a new [Quadrant] or [S-Quadrant] gate if the number of gates is already 47 or more.
[Home] tab
[Gate] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
184/314
The [Gate] group contains the options below.
[Rectangular] You can insert a [Rectangular] gate into a selected dual-parameter plot. To
insert the gate, select the desired plot, and click the [Rectangular] button
and the position in the plot where you want the top-left corner of the gate to
be. To resize, press and hold the mouse button while dragging the points
until the gate is the size you want. Release the mouse button to complete
the gate.
You can also drag the rectangle to change the position while maintaining
its shape.
[Polygon] You can insert a [Polygon] gate into a selected dual-parameter plot. To
insert the gate, select the desired plot, click the [Polygon] button and the
position on the plot where you want the first vertex to be, then click and
release the mouse button. Continue to click on the plot to add additional
points to the polygon to draw the gate around the population of interest. To
complete the process, click the square of the first polygon vertex.
When completed, and you click on the gate, in addition to the vertices
being marked, the polygon will show four outer squares which can be used
for proportional resizing. You can also drag on the polygon to change the
position while maintaining its shape.
[Ellipsoid] You can insert a [Ellipsoid] gate into a selected dual-parameter plot. To
insert the gate, select the desired plot, and click the [Ellipsoid] button and
the position on the plot where you want the top-left corner of the gate to
be. To resize, press and hold the mouse button while dragging the points
until the gate is the size you want. Release the mouse button to complete
the gate.
You can also drag the Ellipsoid to change the position while maintaining
its shape.
[Marker] You can insert a [Marker] gate onto a selected single-parameter plot
(histogram).
To insert the gate, select the desired plot, and click the [Marker] button,
then click on the desired single-parameter plot (histogram) and drag the
line in a horizontal direction to determine the full gate size. Multiple
[Marker] gates can be created on the same plot.
[Quadrant] You can insert a [Quadrant] gate into a selected dual-parameter plot.
[Quadrant] gates are formed from two divider lines (one vertical, one
horizontal).
To insert the gate, select the desired plot, click the [Quadrant] button, and
then click on the plot at the position where you want the central vertex to
be located. To edit the placement of the gate, drag the central vertex to the
desired location.
[S-Quadrant] You can insert an [S-Quadrant] (Staggered Quadrant) gate into a selected
dual-parameter plot. [S-Quadrant] gates are formed from four divider lines
(two vertical, two horizontal) and one connecting line.
To insert the gate, select the desired plot, click the [S-Quadrant] button,
then click on the plot. To edit the placement of the gate, drag each vertex
of the connecting line to the desired location.
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
185/314
⏺ Boolean gate
To display the [Boolean Gate Setting] dialog box, click [Boolean] in the [Gate] group in the [Home] tab.
[Boolean] [Boolean] is a derived gate and is set by selecting the current gates and
defining whether to include or exclude the events within those gates.
To define the gate, select the plot and click the [Boolean] (Boolean Gate)
button to display the [Boolean Gate Setting] dialog box. Events within this
gate are color-defined in the dialog box. You can view the gate statistics in
the statistics table of the plot.
For further information on creating a Boolean gate, see the following:
(➤P.185 "⏺ Boolean gate")
(Gate Setting)
Click this button to edit or delete gates for the selected workitem. You can
also view or change the gate hierarchy.
For further information on editing gates, see the following:
(➤P.186 "⏺ Gate setting")
[New Gate] Click to add a new entry and define the gate.
[Delete] Click to delete a selected gate.
List of Boolean gates
[Gate Name] Displays the name of the gate.
[Gate Equation (Eq.)] Displays the logic expression of the gate.
Area for defining Boolean gate
[Gate Color] Click to define the color of the selected gate.
[Gate Name] Automatically assigned when [New Gate] is clicked.
You can rename the gate by updating the text in the [Gate Name] field.
List of Boolean
gates
Area for defining
Boolean gate
List of current
available gates
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
186/314
⏺ Gate setting
The [Gate] group contains options for creating and managing gates in the current workarea.
[Gate Equation (Eq.)] Enter the logical expression by manually typing it.
Alternatively, you can click on the gate names and the symbols on the
screen individually.
The field is outlined in red and the [Entered gate equation is incorrect.]
message appears until the entered expression is confirmed to be logical.
[AND] Click to define only the events located in the overlapped area of all gates
selected by [AND].
For example, Gate-1 AND Gate-2 includes only the events in the
overlapped area of both gates.
[OR] Click to define all the events located in the gates selected by [OR].
For example, Gate-1 OR Gate-2 includes all the events in both gates.
[NOT] Click to define excluded events.
For example, Gate-1 AND (NOT Gate-2) contains all events from Gate 1,
but the events in Gate-2 or the part where Gate-1 and Gate-2 overlap will
be excluded.
[(]/[)] Click these parentheses to enclose terms to combine more than one type
of Boolean operator in the same statement.
For example, Gate-3 OR (Gate-1 AND Gate-2) includes all events in
Gate-3 and those that are overlapped in Gate-1 and Gate-2.
List of current available gates This area shows the current gates available for selection. You can select
desired gates from the list to create the Boolean gate.
To hide/show this area, click .
[OK] Click the button to apply the new gate settings and close the dialog box. If
any fields contain incomplete information, the message is displayed in red
and the [OK] button is disabled.
[Cancel] Click the button to cancel the new gate settings and close the dialog box.
[Apply] Click the button to apply the new gate settings. The dialog box is not
closed. If any fields contain incomplete information, the message is
displayed in red and the [Apply] button is disabled.
Note:
Any gate can be moved or resized, but you cannot add or delete a vertex for an existing gate.
Statistics are automatically updated after a gate is edited. Changes to a parent gate will affect all
populations derived from that gate.
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
187/314
To display the [Gate Setting] dialog box, click (Gate Setting) of the [Gate] group on the [Home] tab.
You cannot display this dialog box during a run.
[Ungated Color] The color of ungated plots is gray. They cannot be changed.
[Delete] Click the button to delete the currently selected gate. If the gate is set as
the parent gate of another gate, the parent gate of the deleted gate
becomes the new parent gate.
List of gates Displays gates in order of precedence. The gate at the top of the list has
the highest precedence and the gate at the bottom has the lowest
precedence.
When an event belongs to more than one gate, it appears on the plot in
the color of the highest applicable precedence.
To change the precedence of a gate, select the gate you want to move and
click or until the gate moves to the desired location. If you want to
move the gate to the top or the bottom of the list, click or .
[Eq.] Displays whether the gate is a derived gate (which is created based on
Boolean operators). The icon is displayed in this column when the
gate is a derived gate.
[Gate Name] Displays the name of the gate.
[Parent Gate] Displays the name of the parent gate.
Hierarchy view Displays all the gates in a tree structure view. To hide/unhide the hierarchy
view, click .
The hierarchy can also be displayed in the workarea.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.207 "13.9 [Hierarchy] tab")
[Gate Name] Displays gate names.
[#Events] Displays the number of events in a gate.
[%Gated] Displays the percentage of events in a gate compared to all the events in
the parent gate.
[Gate Color] To change the gate color, select the desired color from the drop-down
menu.
[Gate Name] To change the gate name, type the new name in the field.
[Gate Setting] dialog box
Hierarchy
view
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
188/314
13.5.2 [Add Plot] group
The [Add Plot] group contains controls for creating plots in the workarea. You can create a maximum of 50 plots
per workarea. Once this number is reached, the plot creation buttons in the [Add Plot] group become disabled.
The added plot is placed next to the most recently placed plot.
The [Add Plot] group contains the options below.
[Gate Equation (Eq.)] The logical expression is displayed if the selected gate is a Boolean gate.
This field is not enabled. If there is a need to change the logical
expression, click [Boolean] in the [Gate] group and update it in the
[Boolean Gate Setting] dialog box.
[OK] Click the button to apply the new settings and close the dialog box.
[Cancel] Click the button to cancel the new settings and close the dialog box.
[Apply] Click the button to apply the new settings. The dialog box is not closed.
Note:
• You can also right-click on a plot and click (Plot) to quickly access the tool for making changes to the
plot.
• To change the position of a plot in the workarea, select the plot you want to move, drag it to the desired
position, and drop it. You can move plots while measurement is ongoing.
[Color] A [Color] plot is a graphical representation of two-parameter data in which
each axis represents the signal intensity of one parameter. Each dot
represents one or more events above the threshold. Different colors are
used to represent events that are included in a gate. If an event is in
multiple gates, the precedence order of the gate determines the color
displayed.
[Density] A [Density] plot is a graphical representation of two-parameter data in
which each axis represents the signal intensity of one parameter and the
different colors represent the density of events with the same signal
intensity. If a gate is created on the plots, the events in the gate are not
assigned the gate color.
[Add Plot] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
189/314
13.5.3 [Parent Gate] group
You can choose a parent gate of the selected plot in the workarea.
Select the gate you want to set as the parent gate of the plot from the drop-down menu.
[Contour] A [Contour] plot is a graphical representation of two-parameter data where
event densities are depicted with contour lines. Each contour line encloses
an equal percentage of events. The color of each contour line is
determined by the number of events on the contour line. If a gate is
created on the plots, the events in the gate are not assigned the gate color.
[Histogram] A [Histogram] plot is a graphical representation of single-parameter data
where the horizontal axis represents the signal intensity of the selected
parameter and the vertical axis represents the number of events.
[Parent Gate] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
190/314
13.5.4 [Edit] group
You can delete a selected plot in the workarea.
[Delete] Click the button to delete the selected plot or gate in the workarea.
Caution
• If you delete a plot or a gate, the associated gates and statistics table are also deleted.
• If the plot or the gate to be deleted has a gate that is used in the gate equations of other Boolean gates,
the following dialog box appears.
If you click [OK], the Boolean gates that include the deleted gate in the equation are also deleted.
[Edit] group
Example: dialog box shown when deleting a plot
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
191/314
13.6 [View] tab
The [View] tab provides controls to define the scales of selected plots or the plot style of histograms.
13.6.1 [Scaling] group
The controls in the [Scaling] group are used to change the X and Y parameters of the currently selected plot in
the workarea. The scaling of parameters can also be changed.
The [Scaling] group contains the options below.
Note:
This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
Note:
• You can also right-click on a plot and click (Channel) to quickly access the tool to make changes to
the plot.
• You can right-click on the parameter name on the plot to change the name and type of the [X] and [Y]
parameters.
(+Zoom) Click this button to zoom in (maximize) any part of a selected plot. After
selecting the button, click and drag to create a box for the area which you
want to maximize.
(- Zoom) Click this button to close the zoom-in function. Select the plot after clicking
the button to restore the normal view.
[Auto Scaling] Click this button to automatically adjust the scales of the selected plot.
[X] Parameter
Name Select a parameter of the X-axis from the drop-down menu.
Type Select the scale of the X-axis from the drop-down menu. The available
scale types are [Lin] (Linear), [Log], and [Logicle].
[View] tab
[Scaling] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
192/314
13.6.2 [Histogram Style] group
The [Histogram Style] group contains options for scaling the selected histogram for optimal plot visualization.
The [Histogram Style] group contains the following options.
[Min] Enter the minimum number of counts of the X-axis.
[Max] Enter the maximum number of counts of the X-axis.
[Negative %] When [Logicle] is selected as the scale type, the range can be set from 0.0
to 30.0 %. The number can be selected from the drop-down menu in
increments of 5 %.
When [Lin] or [Log] is selected as the scale type, this button is disabled.
[Y] Parameter
Name Select a parameter of the Y-axis from the drop-down menu.
Type Select the scale of the Y-axis from the drop-down menu. The available
scale types are [Lin] (Linear), [Log], and [Logicle].
[Min] Enter the minimum number of counts of the Y-axis.
[Max] Enter the maximum number of counts of the Y-axis.
[Negative %] When [Logicle] is selected as the scale type, the range can be set from 0.0
to 30.0 %. The number can be selected from the drop-down menu in
increments of 5 %.
When [Lin] or [Log] is selected as the scale type, this button is disabled.
[Auto Scaling] Select this option to enable automatic scaling of the selected histogram.
[Max Counts] Select this option to manually adjust the scales of the selected histogram.
Enter the desired number of maximum counts of the Y-axis in the [Max
Counts] field.
[Histogram Style] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
193/314
13.7 [Compensation] tab
The [Compensation] tab provides controls allowing you to calculate the compensation of an active workitem or
subset panel.
13.7.1 [Compensation] group
The [Compensation] group provides options for displaying or changing the current compensation matrix.
Note:
This operation is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
[Show Matrix] Click this button to show the [Compensation Matrix] dialog. It shows the
compensation matrix associated with the active workitem or subset panel,
and allows you to manually edit or reset spillover values. The changes are
applied to all the plots in the workarea of the active workitem or subset
panel.
[Auto] Click this button to display the [Compensation Wizard] dialog box which
simplifies the process of generating a compensation matrix.
[Compensation] tab
[Compensation] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
194/314
⏺ Performing manual compensation
1 Click the [Compensation] tab in the ribbon menu.
2 Click [Show Matrix] in the [Compensation] group.
The [Compensation Matrix] dialog box appears.
The compensation matrix shows the spillover values from the last compensation. The rows are for each detector
and the columns are for each fluorochrome. For example, the spillover value of FL2_A (i.e. PE) into FL1_A (i.e.
FL1 detector) is 1.000 % in the above matrix with the condition of Area parameter.
3 Edit or reset spillover values.
4 Click [OK].
Spillover grid control Enter spillover values between -500.000 and 500.000. The names of the
rows and columns display parameters available. You can also check the
plots displayed in the workarea by scrolling the workarea.
[Parameter:] Select [Area] or [Height] as the parameter displayed in the spillover grid
control.
[Reset all] Click this button to reset all values not lying on the matrix diagonal line to
0.000.
[OK] Click this button to save changes made in the matrix and close the dialog
box.
[Cancel] Click this button to cancel any changes made in the matrix and close the
dialog box.
[Apply] Click this button to apply changes made in the matrix. The dialog box does
not close.
[Compensation Matrix] dialog box
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
195/314
⏺ Performing automatic compensation
1 Prepare each 200 μL of single-stained samples to be run for the
compensation, and place them in a rotor.
Regardless of the measurement conditions of a workitem or subset panel to which you want to apply spillover
values from this process, the aspiration volume set for this process is 200 μL. To ensure that the sample is
sufficient for the measurement, prepare more than the above required volume.
2 Select and activate the workitem or the subset panel to which you want to
apply spillover values from this compensation.
3 Click the [Compensation] tab in the ribbon menu.
4 Click [Auto] in the [Compensation] group.
The compensation wizard starts and the
[Configuration Page] is displayed.
5 Select [Measure].
6 Select the parameter ([Area] or [Height]) you want to use for the
compensation.
7 Select the desired channels to automatically set up the compensation values.
8 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [AutoLoader]. If the
mode is set to [Manual], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [AutoLoader].
[Configuration Page] screen
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
196/314
9 Enter the 4-digit rotor number.
The rotor type for the entered rotor
number will be displayed.
10 Verify that the single-stained sample tubes are placed at each rotor position
as described in the instruction area on the screen.
11 Place the rotor in the auto loader.
For more information about how to place the rotor in the auto loader, see the following:
(➤P.168 "Chapter 12: 12.3.1 Running samples with the auto loader (auto loader analysis)", steps 2 to 3, and
steps 6 to 9)
Caution
Place each sample tube in the correct position of the rotor so that it matches the instruction area on the
screen.
There is a risk of incorrect compensation results if the placement is incorrect.
Instruction
Rotor type
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
197/314
12 Click [Next].
The compensation process starts.
During acquisition, the auto loader analysis status
indicator LED blinks green and the rotor position
currently being acquired is displayed in the status
area.
When acquisition of all the sample tubes is finished,
the [Compensation Wizard] displays the
[Compensation Page] for the first channel as shown
in the screen on the right.
13 Define the gate for each [Plot 1] and [Plot 2] to obtain spillover values of the
fluorochrome to the other detectors.
14 Click [Next] to proceed to the next compensation page.
The [Compensation Matrix] updates spillover values based on the gating defined on the previous pages.
[Channel] This field displays the channel selected in the [Configuration Page].
[Workitem] These fields are left blank.
[Adjust compensation and negative regions.]
[Plot 1] The ungated dual-parameter density plot is displayed with FSC for the X-axis and
SSC for the Y-axis. You can change the scaling (except channels) for each X and
Y axis by right-clicking on the axis.
The plot contains a green 4-vertex polygon gate. You can move each vertex and
resize it as required to define the gating region. Any adjustment of the region
automatically updates the histogram plot on [Plot 2].
[Plot 2] A single parameter plot (histogram) is displayed based on the Gate-1 region
defined on [Plot 1]. The X-axis on the plot is the current compensation parameter.
The plot contains a blue marker gate. You can move and resize the gate to specify
the positive population for that fluorochrome as Gate-2.
[Compensation Matrix] The matrix displays the currently calculated spillover values.
After clicking [Next] in step 14, the values in the matrix are updated.
[Back] Click to go back to the previous page if you need to change settings on the
previous page. Changes made to the current page are canceled.
[Next] Click to save your changes and go to the next page.
[Cancel] Click to cancel the compensation process.
[Compensation Page] screen
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
198/314
15 Repeat steps 13 and 14 for all the selected channels.
When you click [Next] in the last channel, the complete compensation matrix table is displayed.
Check the spillover values in the matrix table.
16 Click [OK] once you complete the compensation of all required channels.
The dialog box on the right appears.
If you want to redefine the gates, click [Cancel].
17 Click [OK].
The [Compensation Wizard] is completed.
The result is applied to the workitem or the subset panel activated in step 2.
Note:
If the auto-compensation is for a subset panel, make sure to click (Save) to save the matrix table.
The changes will be lost if you do not click (Save).
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
199/314
⏺ Performing automatic compensation using measured workitems of
single-stained samples
1 Confirm that workitems for the single-stained samples are included in the
worklist with the [Measured] status.
Prior to auto-compensation, you can register the workitems and run the single-stained samples for the desired
channels/fluorochromes.
For details on registering workitems, see the following:
(➤P.89 "Chapter 10 Registering panel/subset panel and workitems")
For details on running samples, see the following:
(➤P.163 "Chapter 12 Running samples")
2 Select and activate the workitem or subset panel to which you want to apply
spillover values from this auto-compensation.
3 Click the [Compensation] tab in the ribbon menu.
4 Click [Auto] in the [Compensation] group.
The compensation wizard starts and the
[Configuration Page] screen is displayed.
[Configuration Page] screen
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
200/314
5 Select [Use workitems].
The [Configuration Page] screen switches to the
screen shown on the right.
The [Workitems with identical channel settings] list
displays the workitems which have the same
channel settings as the workitem or subset panel
you selected in step 2.
6 Select the parameter ([Area] or [Height]) you want to use for the
compensation.
7 Select the desired channels and the corresponding workitems of the singlestained
samples.
1 Select one of the desired channels.
The row is highlighted in blue. Confirm that the icon is shown on the left.
2 From the [Workitems with identical channel settings] list, select the
workitem which corresponds to the channel.
The [Primary ID], [Secondary ID], and [Comment] of the selected workitem are displayed in the selected
channel.
3 Repeat sub-steps 1 and 2 for all desired channels.
[Configuration Page] screen
[Workitems with identical channel settings] list
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
201/314
8 Click [Next].
The [Compensation Page] screen is displayed for
each selected channel.
9 Define the gate for each Plot 1 and Plot 2 to obtain spillover values of the
fluorochrome to the other detectors.
10 Click [Next] to proceed to the next compensation page.
The [Compensation Matrix] updates spillover values based on the gating defined in the previous pages.
[Channel] This field displays the first channel selected on the [Compensation Page].
[Workitem] Each field displays the workitem information ([Primary ID], [Secondary ID], and
[Comment]) for the corresponding single-stained sample.
[Adjust compensation and negative regions.]
[Plot 1] The ungated dual-parameter density plot is displayed with FSC for the X-axis and
SSC for the Y-axis. You can change the scaling (except channels) for each X and
Y axis by right-clicking on the axis.
The plot contains a green 4-vertex polygon gate. You can move each vertex and
resize it as required to define the gating region. Any adjustment of the region
automatically updates the histogram plot on [Plot 2].
[Plot 2] A single parameter plot (histogram) is displayed based on the Gate-1 region
defined on [Plot 1]. The X-axis on the plot is the current compensation parameter.
The plot contains a blue marker gate. You can move and resize the gate to specify
the positive population for the fluorochrome as Gate-2.
[Compensation Matrix] This matrix displays the currently calculated spillover values.
After clicking [Next] in step 10, the values in the matrix are updated.
[Back] Click to go back to the previous page if you need to change settings on the
previous page. Changes made to the current page are canceled.
[Next] Click to save your changes and go to the next channel.
[Cancel] Click to cancel the compensation process.
[Compensation Page] screen
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
202/314
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all the selected channels.
When you click [Next] in the last channel, the complete [Compensation Matrix] is displayed.
Check the spillover values in the matrix.
12 Click [OK] after you complete the compensation of all required channels.
The dialog box on the right appears.
If you want to redefine the gates, click [Cancel].
13 Click [OK].
The [Compensation Wizard] is completed.
The result is applied to the workitem activated in step 2.
13.7.2 [Apply] group
The [Apply] group contains the option to enable or disable compensation.
Note:
If the auto-compensation is for a subset panel, make sure to click (Save) to save the matrix table.
The changes will be lost if you do not click (Save).
[Enable Compensation] Select the checkbox to enable compensation of the active workitem or
subset panel. When cleared, compensation is disabled. If you clear the
checkbox after you apply the compensation, the plots change to the status
before the compensation was applied. The spillover values you set in the
compensation matrix remain even after clearing the [Enable
Compensation] checkbox.
[Apply] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
203/314
13.8 [Statistics] tab
The [Statistics] tab provides controls for displaying statistics tables for gates on the plots and selecting statistics you
want to display in the associated statistics table in the workarea.
Note:
This operation (except for [Display] group) is not available if the user’s role is [Operator].
[Statistics] tab
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
204/314
13.8.1 [Statistics] group
You can create a new statistics table or delete an existing statistics table.
[New Table] This button becomes active when the workitem or the subset panel is
activated and a plot that does not have a statistics table is selected in the
workarea. You can choose statistics shown in the [Item] group on the
[Statistics] tab by clicking this button. Statistics selected in the [Item] group
are displayed if [Display Table] is checked.
The button is disabled if a statistics table is already added to the plot. If the
table is not displayed but the button is disabled, select the [Display Table]
checkbox, and the table appears.
If a statistical value cannot be calculated, the [----] is displayed in red,
indicating that it is not a calculable value.
[Delete Table] Click the button to delete the statistics table of the selected plot. This is
enabled only when there is a statistics table in the selected plot.
[Statistics] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
205/314
13.8.2 [Display] group
13.8.3 [Item] group
You can select which statistic is presented in the associated statistics table for each gated plot. Selecting a
checkbox enables the statistics to be displayed in the statistics table.
The statistics available for selection are listed below.
[Display Table] If you select the checkbox, the area for inserting a statistics table is
displayed under each plot. You can also select this checkbox to display the
statistics table already added, if it is not displayed. Clearing the checkbox
hides all the statistics tables displayed.
[#Events] Displays the number of events in a gate.
[%Gated] Displays the percentage of events in a gate compared to all the events in
the parent gate.
[%Total] Displays the percentage of events in a gate compared to all the events.
[X [ch] Mode] Displays the number of the channel of the maximum number of events for
the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X #Mode] Displays the number of events of the X [ch] Mode for the X-axis parameter
of a gate.
[X A. Mean] Displays the arithmetic mean of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X G. Mean] Displays the geometric mean of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X Median] Displays the median of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X Var] Displays the variance of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X SD] Displays the standard deviation of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X %CV] Displays the %CV (percentage coefficient of variation) statistics of the Xaxis
parameter of a gate.
[Display] group
[Item] group
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
206/314
* When the gate is on a single-parameter plot (histogram), these items are unavailable for selection.
[X %HP-CV] Displays the %HP-CV (percentage half-peak coefficient of variation)
statistics of the X-axis parameter of a gate.
[X %rCV] Displays the percentage robust CV (coefficient of variation) statistics of the
X-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y [ch] Mode]* Displays the number of the channel of the maximum number of events for
the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y #Mode]* Displays the number of events of the Y [ch] Mode for the Y-axis parameter
of a gate.
[Y A. Mean]* Displays the arithmetic mean of the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y G. Mean]* Displays the geometric mean of the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y Median]* Displays the median of the Y-axis parameter of the gate.
[Y Var]* Displays the variance of the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y SD]* Displays the standard deviation of the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y %CV]* Displays the %CV (percentage coefficient of variation) statistics for the Yaxis
parameter of a gate.
[Y %HP-CV]* Displays the %HP-CV (percentage half-peak coefficient of variation)
statistics for the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
[Y %rCV]* Displays the percentage robust CV (coefficient of variation) statistics for
the Y-axis parameter of a gate.
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
207/314
13.9 [Hierarchy] tab
To see the entire gate hierarchy with the statistics data in the workarea, click the [Hierarchy] tab of the workarea
below.
• By default, the ribbon menu’s [Statistics] tab is shown on this page.
Tabs other than the [Statistics] tab cannot be displayed.
• You can display or hide other columns by selecting or deselecting display items from [Statistics] - [Item].
For details on each statistics item, see the following:
(➤P.205 "13.8.3 [Item] group")
Note:
You can use the and buttons under [Gate Name] to collapse the display so that only the parent gate
is shown, or expand it to show gates under the parent gate.
Chapter 13 Data analysis tools
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
208/314
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
209/314
Chapter 14 Creating reports
This chapter explains how to create reports for data of every analyzed sample, including plots, statistics, and
compensation matrixes that can be summarized in a page-based report and saved or printed.
14.1 Creating a report
14.1.1 [Reports] tab of the workarea
A report can be created manually in the [Reports] tab of the workarea below.
Ribbon menu Functions for creating a report are provided.
(➤P.210 "14.1.2 The [Report] tab of ribbon menu")
Layout area You can place and lay out objects selected in the ribbon menu.
(➤P.211 "14.1.3 Creating a report")
Property area You can select the properties of each object in the layout area.
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
Note:
• You can create a report only when a workitem or a subset panel is active.
• For details on reports for cytometer QC and panel QC, see the following:
(➤P.82 "Chapter 9: 9.10.3 Displaying cytometer QC results")
(➤P.158 "Chapter 11: 11.8.3 Displaying daily panel QC results")
[Reports] tab of the workarea
Layout area Property area
Ribbon menu
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
210/314
14.1.2 The [Report] tab of ribbon menu
The [Report] tab of the ribbon menu is used for selecting commands to create the report.
The following groups are available.
[Page Setup] Options to add new pages to the report, organize the pages of the report, and
change the orientation and size of the pages in the report.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.225 "14.2.1 [Page Setup] group")
[Insert Link] Select this option to insert objects into the report. The objects are linked to
the data being analyzed in the [Plots] tab of the workarea.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.226 "14.2.2 [Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group")
[Insert Capture] Select this option to insert objects into the report. The objects are not linked
to the data being analyzed in the [Plots] tab of the workarea.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.226 "14.2.2 [Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group")
[Insert Item] Options to insert image files, tables, text boxes, and lines into the report.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.228 "14.2.3 [Insert Item] group")
[Arrange] Options to move, align, or resize objects, and display gridlines.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.230 "14.2.6 [Arrange] group")
[Zoom] Options to zoom the page view in or out using predefined percentages.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.229 "14.2.4 [Zoom] group")
[Edit] Options to select, copy, cut, paste, or delete objects in the report. Undo and
Redo commands are also available.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.229 "14.2.5 [Edit] group")
Note:
These controls are only enabled when you are on the [Reports] tab of the workarea.
[Report] tab of the ribbon menu
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
211/314
14.1.3 Creating a report
1 Select the workitem or subset panel for which you want to create a report.
Make sure that the selected workitem or subset panel is active. If not, activate it by clicking (Active).
The workarea (the [Plots] tab) displays the plots of the selected workitem.
2 Click the [Reports] tab in the workarea.
The report layout area of the active workitem or
subset panel is displayed.
By default, the page is blank.
3 From the [Page Setup] group, select the desired page orientation ([Portrait] or
[Landscape]) and page size ([A4] or [Letter]).
4 From the [Insert Link], [Insert Capture], or [Insert Item] groups, click the item
that you want to display in the report.
5 Click on the desired section of the layout area (body) to insert the selected
item in a default size, or draw an insertion rectangle to create a custom size.
6 Select the properties of the inserted item in the [Property] area.
For more details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
7 Use the other options to insert and organize pages, to arrange or edit inserted
items, and to set the page view zoom in/out options.
[Reports] tab of the workarea
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
212/314
14.1.4 Property area
Commands displayed in the property area allow you to select the settings of objects inserted into the layout
area.
⏺ Properties of items inserted from the [Insert Link] and [Insert Capture] groups
Item type name Property Description
Plot [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of inserted items,
which you can set as listed below.
[Plot Type] Select the type of plot you want to display on the page.
[Title] Select the plot number of the selected [Plot Type] you want to
display on the page.
[Top] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under that group.
Layout area Property area
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
213/314
Plot
(continued)
[Height] You can define the height of the object by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the object by entering the number.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object where you can set each property listed below.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. You
can select [Top], [Bottom] or [None]. If you select [None], no title is
displayed.
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
Item type name Property Description
Plot and Statistics [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item
which you can set as listed below.
[Plot Type] Select the type of plot you want to display on the page.
[Title] Select the plot number of the selected [Plot Type] you want to
display on the page.
[Top] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the object by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the object by entering the number.
[LineColor] You can define the color of the borders of the statistics table. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under that group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
214/314
Plot and Statistics
(continued)
[StatisticsHeight] You can adjust the height of the statistics table by moving the
slider bar from top to bottom.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object where you can set each property listed below.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. You
can select [Top], [Bottom] or [None]. If you select [None], no title is
displayed.
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Header Cell]* The [Header Cell] group displays properties related to the header
cells of the statistics table where you can set each property listed
below.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can define a font color of the headers. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the header cells. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Data Cell]* The [Data Cell] group displays properties related to the Data cells
of statistics table where you can set each property listed below.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
215/314
Plot and Statistics
(continued)
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the cells. The software uses
the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
Item type name Property Description
Statistics Table [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item
which you can set as listed below.
[Plot Type] You can select the type of plot you want to display on the page.
[Title] You can select the plot number of the selected [Plot Type] you
want to display on the page.
[Top] You can define the position of the statistics table on the page.
Enter the distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the statistics table on the page.
Enter the distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the statistics table by entering a
number.
[Width] You can define the width of the statistics table by entering a
number.
[LineColor] You can define the color of the borders of the statistics table. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object where you can set each property listed below.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. You
can select [Top], [Bottom] or [None]. If you select [None], no title is
displayed.
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
216/314
Statistics Table
(continued)
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Header Cell]* The [Header Cell] group displays properties related to header cells
of the statistics table where you can set each property listed below.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can define a font color of the headers. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the header cells. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Data Cell]* The [Data Cell] group displays properties related to the data cells
where you can set each property.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the cells. The software uses
the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
217/314
Item type name Property Description
Comp. Matrix [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item
which you can set as listed below.
[Title] You can select the [Area] or [Height] of the compensation matrix
you want to display on the page.
[Top] You can define the position of the compensation matrix table on
the page. Enter the distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the compensation matrix table on
the page. Enter the distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the compensation matrix table by
entering a number.
[Width] You can define the width of the compensation matrix table by
entering a number.
[LineColor] You can define the color of borders of the compensation matrix
table. The software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object where you can set each property listed below.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. You
can select [Top], [Bottom] or [None]. If you select [None], no title is
displayed.
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Header Cell]* The [Header Cell] group displays properties related to header
cells of the compensation matrix table inserted where you can set
each property listed below.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
218/314
Comp. Matrix
(continued)
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can define a font color of the headers. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the header cells. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Data Cell]* The [Data Cell] group displays properties related to the data cells
where you can set each property.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the cells. The software uses
the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
Item type name Property Description
Workitem Entry [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item.
You can set these as listed below.
[WorkitemEntry] Select information associated with the workitem which you want
to display on the report.
If you want to view errors associated with a workitem data on the
report, select [Error] or [Error Details] in the list.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
219/314
Workitem Entry
(continued)
[Top] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the object by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the object by entering the number.
[Title] You can select this checkbox if you want to display the title of the
workitem object.
[TitleWidth] You can adjust width of the workitem title by moving the slider bar
from left to right.
[Title Text]* The [Title Text] group displays properties related to title of the
object, where you can set each property listed below.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Data Text]* The [Data Text] group displays properties related to the text cells,
where you can set each property separately.
[Horizontal] You can select the text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select the text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define the background color of the cells. The software
uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
220/314
Item type name Property Description
Field [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item.
You can set these as listed below.
[Title] Select the information you want to display in the report.
[Top] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the object on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of an object by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of an object by entering the number.
[Title] You can select this checkbox if you want to display the title of the
inserted field.
[TitleWidth] You can adjust width of the field title by moving the slider bar from
left to right.
[Title Text]* The [Title Text] group displays the properties related to title of the
object. You can set each property listed below.
[Horizontal] You can select text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Data Text]* The [Data Text] group displays properties related to the text cells
where you can set each property.
[Horizontal] You can select text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the cells. The software uses
the default color picker dialog.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
221/314
⏺ Properties of items inserted from the [Insert Item] group
Field
(continued)
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
Item type name Property Description
Image [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item.
You can set these as listed below.
[Top] You can define the position of the image on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the image on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the image by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the image by entering the number.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object. You can set each property listed below.
[Title] Enter the tile of the image.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. If
you select [None], no title is displayed. You can select [Top],
[Bottom] or [None].
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
222/314
Table [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item.
You can set these as listed below.
[Top] You can define the position of the table on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the table on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the table by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the table by entering the number.
[Row Count] You can define number of rows of the table.
[Column Count] You can define number of columns of the table.
[LineColor] You can define the color of the borders of the table. The software
uses the default color picker dialog.
[Title]* The [Title] group displays properties related to the title of the
object. You can set each property listed below.
[Title] Enter the title of the table.
[Position] You can select where or whether you want to display the title. If
you select [None], no title is displayed. You can select [Top],
[Bottom] or [None].
[Horizontal] You can select the position of the title from [Left], [Center], or
[Right].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the title. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the title area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
[Cell Info]* The [Cell Info] group displays properties related to each cell in the
Table.
[RowIndex] Enter the Row number for which you want to set properties.
The row number starts from 0.
[ColIndex] Enter the Column number for which you want to set properties.
The column number starts from 0.
[Text] Enter text which you want to display in the cell.
[Horizontal] You can select text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
223/314
Table
(continued)
[FontColor] You can select a font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can define a background color of the cell. The software uses
the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
Text Box [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item
which you can set as listed below.
[Top] You can define the position of the text box on the page. Enter the
distance from the top of the page.
[Left] You can define the position of the text box on the page. Enter the
distance from the left edge of the page.
[Height] You can define the height of the text box by entering the number.
[Width] You can define the width of the text box by entering the number.
[Text] Enter the text you want to display in the text box.
[Horizontal] You can select text alignment from [Left], [Center], or [Right].
[Vertical] You can select text alignment from [Top], [Center], or [Bottom].
[FontColor] You can select the font color of the text. The software uses the
default color picker dialog.
[BackColor] You can select the background color of the text area. The
software uses the default color picker dialog.
[Font] You can select the font type from the drop-down menu. The list
includes all fonts installed on the system.
[FontSize] You can define the font size by directly entering the number.
[Bold] You can select bold, italics, and/or underline options to format the
[Italic] font.
[UnderLine]
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
224/314
Line [ItemType] Displays the type of the inserted item.
[Common]* The [Common] group displays the properties of the inserted item.
You can set these as listed below.
[X1] You can define the starting point (X1) of the inserted line by
entering the number. The horizontal coordinates are X1 and X2;
the vertical coordinates are Y1 and Y2.
[Y1] You can define the starting point (Y1) of the inserted line by
entering the number. The horizontal coordinates are X1 and X2;
the vertical coordinates are Y1 and Y2.
[X2] You can define the ending point (X2) of the inserted line by
entering the number. The horizontal coordinates are X1 and X2;
the vertical coordinates are Y1 and Y2.
[Y2] You can define the ending point (Y2) of the inserted line by
entering the number. The horizontal coordinates are X1 and X2;
the vertical coordinates are Y1 and Y2.
[LineColor] You can define a color of the line. The software uses the default
color picker dialog.
[Thickness] You can define the thickness of the line. Enter the number.
[LineType] You can select the type of line from the drop-down menu.
[LineStartCap] You can select a line start cap from the drop-down menu.
[LineEndCap] You can select a line end cap from the drop-down menu.
* By clicking the icon, you can hide the properties under the group.
Item type name Property Description
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
225/314
14.2 The [Report] tab of the ribbon menu
14.2.1 [Page Setup] group
The [Page Setup] group contains the following buttons:
(New Pages) • Click (New Pages) to add a new blank page to the end of the report.
• Up to 20 pages can be added to the report.
• When the maximum number of pages is reached, the button is disabled.
(Page Organization) Click (Page Organization) to display the following dialog box.
• A list of all pages is displayed.
• Select the desired page and click the corresponding button to move the page
up or down, to delete the page, or to delete all pages.
• Select the [Page Number] checkbox if you want to display page numbers on the
report. If selected, you can specify where to display the page numbers from the
drop-down menu [Horizontal], and also select the [Font], [FontSize], and
[FontColor] of the page numbers.
• Click [OK] to close the dialog box and apply the changes made in the dialog box
to the report pages.
• Click [Cancel] to close the dialog box and cancel any changes made.
[Page Setup] group
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
226/314
14.2.2 [Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group
• The [Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group contains options to insert objects into the report.
• When the [Insert Link] option is selected, the objects are linked with the data being analyzed in the [Plots] tab of
the workarea.
• When the [Insert Capture] option is selected, the objects are not linked with the data being analyzed in the [Plots] tab of
the workarea.
• To insert an object into the report, first select any of the buttons described below, then click on the desired
location in the report to insert the object with a default size. You can also draw a square of the size you want
by dragging the mouse on the report. To resize the object, drag one of its selection handles.
The [Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group contains the following buttons:
[Orientation] • Select the page orientation ([Portrait] or [Landscape]) from the drop-down menu.
• The selected page orientation is applied to all pages in the report.
• All header, footer and body objects that lie outside the bounds of the new page
orientation are automatically resized to fit the new orientation. If the orientation
is then switched back, resized objects will not be restored to their original size
or position.
[Size] • Select the page size ([A4] or [Letter]) from the drop-down menu.
• The selected page size is applied to all pages in the report.
• All header, footer and body objects that lie outside the bounds of the new page
size are automatically resized to fit the new size. If the size is then switched
back, resized objects are not restored to their original size or position.
• Margins are defined depending on the page size selected.
(Plot) • Click (Plot), then click on the desired area in the report where you want to
insert the object.
• Choose a plot from the drop-down menu of [Plot Type] and [Title] under
[Common] in the property area. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
The listed plot types and plot numbers match those that appear in the [Plots]
tab of the workarea.
[Insert Link] [Insert Capture] group
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
227/314
(Plot and Statistics) • Click (Plot and Statistics), then click on the desired area in the report where
you want to insert the object.
• Choose a plot from the drop-down menu of [Plot Type] and [Title] under
[Common] in the property area. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
The listed plot types and plot numbers match those that appear in the [Plots]
tab of the workarea.
• The set of plot images and the corresponding statistics table is inserted into the
report.
(Statistics Table) • Click (Statistics Table), then click on the desired area in the report where
you want to insert the statistics table.
• Choose a plot from the drop-down menu of [Plot Type] and [Title] under
[Common] in the property area. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
The listed plot types and plot numbers match those that appear in the [Plots]
tab of the workarea.
(Comp. Matrix) Click (Comp. Matrix), then click on the desired area in the report where you
want to insert the compensation matrix table. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
(Workitem Entry) Click (Workitem Entry), then click on the desired area in the report where you
want to insert the workitem entry. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
(Field) Click (Field), then click on the desired area in the report where you want to
insert the user name, version, print date/time, facility, system, or instrument
information. For details, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
Note:
For details on setting the properties of each inserted object, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
228/314
14.2.3 [Insert Item] group
The [Insert Item] group contains the following buttons:
(Image) • Click (Image), then click on the desired area in the report where you want to
insert an Image object.
• The [Open] dialog box appears to navigate to the desired folder. Select the
image file for insertion.
• Image files with the extension ".bmp", ".jpg", ".jpeg", ".png", and ".gif" are
supported.
• Click [Open] or double-click on the image file to insert the selected image file
into the report.
• If the inserted image lies outside the bounds of the page, it is automatically
resized.
• Images are inserted into the body section of a page by default.
(Table) • Click (Table), then click on the desired area in the report where you want to
insert a table object.
• The [ReportTableInitialize] dialog box appears. Enter the number of rows and
columns for the table.
• Click [OK], and the table is displayed in the report.
• Click a cell in the table and enter text in the [Text] section of the [Property] area.
(Text Box) • Click (Text Box), then click on the desired area in the report where you want
to insert a text box object.
• Click on the cell and enter text in the [Text] section of the [Property] area. You
may need to resize the text box.
(Line) • Click (Line), then click on the desired area in the report where you want to
insert a line object.
Note:
For details on setting the properties of inserted objects, see the following:
(➤P.212 "14.1.4 Property area")
[Insert Item] group
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
229/314
14.2.4 [Zoom] group
The [Zoom] group contains options to zoom in or out on the page using predefined percentages.
If you want to zoom in (maximize) the page view, click (+Zoom).
If you want to zoom out (minimize) the page view, or close the zoom-in function and restores the normal page
view, click (- Zoom).
14.2.5 [Edit] group
The [Edit] group contains the following options to select or delete objects in the report.
(Select All (Active Page)) Click to select all the objects on the selected page of the report.
(Select All) Click to select all the objects in the entire report.
(Copy) Click to copy the selected object in the report.
(Copy Image) Click to copy the selected object as an image object.
(Cut) Click to cut the selected object in the report.
(Paste) Click to paste the copied object in the report.
(Undo) Click to undo the last change.
(Redo) Click to reverse the undo.
(Delete) Click to delete the selected object from the report.
[Zoom] group
[Edit] group
Chapter 14 Creating reports
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
230/314
14.2.6 [Arrange] group
The [Arrange] group contains the following options.
⏺ Aligning objects
You can align objects in the report in the following ways. The commands are available only when multiple
objects are selected in the report, unless otherwise stated. To select the objects, click the first object, then
press and hold the SHIFT key while you click on the other objects. You can also click outside the objects and
drag to create a selection box.
⏺ Moving an object forward or backward
You can change the stack layer order of objects in the report.
Select the object that you want to move. If the object is hidden, select any object, and then press the TAB key
or SHIFT + TAB repeatedly until the object that you want is selected.
⏺ Others
(Aligned Left) Click to align the left edges of the selected objects.
(Aligned Right) Click to align the right edges of the selected objects.
(Aligned Top) Click to align the top edges of the selected objects.
(Aligned Bottom) Click to align the bottom edges of the selected objects.
(Bring Forward) Click to bring an object one step closer to the front.
(Bring to Front) Click to bring an object to the front of the stack.
(Send Backward) Click to send an object one step toward the back.
(Send to Back) Click to send an object to the back of the stack.
(Grid Snap Mode) Click to display the lines that form the grid to which the selected objects are
snapped to the nearest point of the grid.
(Batch Resize) Click to resize the selected multiple objects.
To select the objects that you want to resize, click the first object, and then press
and hold the SHIFT key while you click the other objects. You can also click
outside the objects and drag to create a selection box.
[Arrange] group
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
231/314
Chapter 15 User settings
This chapter explains how to configure the analyzer and IPU settings.
15.1 Settings by objective
The table below shows the functions that you can set on the instrument.
The availability of each setting is dependent on the user role.
(➤P.241 "15.4.6 User administration")
Desired action Refer to
User permissions Set operation permissions
separately for each user.
➤P.241 "15.4.6 User administration"
Set a user to be automatically
logged on when the instrument is
started.
Change the user password.
Screen display Change the display language. ➤P.240 "15.4.3 System language"
Change the date format. ➤P.241 "15.4.5 Date format"
Display a confirmation dialog box
informing you that the oldest
workitem will be deleted when the
number of saved workitems
exceeds the upper limit.
➤P.246 "15.4.9 Worklist"
Set up multiple monitors. ➤P.240 "15.4.4 Display"
Lock the screen after a certain
amount of time has passed without
any user operation.
➤P.250 "15.4.14 Security settings"
Alarm sound • Change the alarm sound for errors.
• Turn off the alarm sound for errors.
• Change the number of times
the alarm sounds for an error.
➤P.255 "15.5.2 Alarm sound"
Analysis Validate analysis results
automatically.
➤P.248 "15.4.12 Auto-validate"
Enable intake and exhaust agitation
(auto loader)
➤P.256 "15.5.4 Auto loader"
Output Set the connection to a graphic
printer.
➤P.253 "15.4.17 Printer"
Include patient information when
exporting FCS files.
➤P.250 "15.4.14 Security settings"
• Export an FCS file when a workitem
is validated.
• Export an FCS file automatically
when daily QC measurement of
cytometer QC or baseline
measurement is performed.
➤P.249 "15.4.13 Output"
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
232/314
15.2 Settings available for each user authority
The table below shows the functions that you can set on the instrument based on your user authority.
✔: Possible to change the settings
-: Not possible to change the settings, but can check/see the settings
Initialize Initialize IPU settings. ➤P.254 "⏺ Initializing settings"
Initialize analyzer settings. ➤P.254 "⏺ Initializing settings"
Connection Connect to a host computer. ➤P.251 "15.4.15 Host computer"
Connect to the PS-10. ➤P.252 "15.4.16 PS-10"
Backup Back up IPU settings. ➤P.238 "⏺ Saving settings (backup)"
Back up analyzer settings. ➤P.253 "⏺ Save settings"
Restore Restore IPU settings. ➤P.239 "⏺ Restoring backed up settings
(restore)"
Restore analyzer settings. ➤P.254 "⏺ Restoring backed up settings
(restore)"
Instrument information Change the instrument name. ➤P.255 "15.5.3 Instrument"
Change the facility name. ➤P.240 "15.4.2 Facility information"
Version information Check the current version
information.
➤P.237 "15.3.3 Opening the version
information dialog box"
Password management Increase password security. ➤P.245 "15.4.7 Password management"
Account Lockout ➤P.246 "15.4.8 Account Lockout"
Setting menu
[User Authority]
[Administrator]
(Built-in)
[Administrator] [Supervisor]
[Assay
Developer]
[Operator]
IPU settings
[Facility Information] ✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[System Language] ✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Date Format] ✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Password
Management]
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[User Administration]
[Auto Logon] ✔ - - - -
[Change Password] ✔ ✔*1 ✔*1 ✔*4 ✔*4
[Reset Password] ✔*3 ✔*1 ✔*1 ✔*4 ✔*4
[Modify Settings]
[Add User]
✔*3 ✔*1 ✔*1 ✔*4,5 ✔*4,5
[Delete User] ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔*2 - -
[Change Status] ✔*3 ✔*2 ✔*2 - -
Desired action Refer to
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
233/314
[Connect]
([Printer])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Manage settings]
[Backup] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Restore] ✔ - - - -
[Set Default] (initialize) ✔ - - - -
[Display] (Single/Multidisplay)
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Work Area]
([Number of events
displayed on a plot
during acquisition])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Connect]
([Host Computer])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Connect]
([PS-10])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Validate]
([Auto-validate])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Output]
([Auto FCS Output])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Output]
([Auto Host Output])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Output]
([Auto Report Output])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Worklist]
([Confirm oldest
workitem deletion])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Workitem]
([Secondary ID input])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Workitem]
([Workitem Edit]
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
Security settings ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Analyzer settings
[Instrument]
([Instrument Nickname])
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Alarm Sound] ✔ ✔ ✔ - -
[Manage settings]
[Backup] ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
[Restore] ✔ - - - -
[Set Default] (initialize) ✔ - - - -
[Auto Loader]
Setting menu
[User Authority]
[Administrator]
(Built-in)
[Administrator] [Supervisor]
[Assay
Developer]
[Operator]
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
234/314
*1: Cannot change settings for Administrator(Built-in)
*2: Cannot change settings for Logged-on user and Adiministrator(Built-in)
*3: Cannot change settings for Logged-on user
*4: Only logged-on uesrs can change settings (cannot add users)
*5: Can change only operator names, operator roles, and display language
15.3 Opening the settings dialog box
The settings consist of [IPU Setting] for configuring IPU system settings, [Analyzer Setting] for the analyzer settings,
and [Version Information] for showing the version information of the IPU. The settings are configured from the [IPU
Settings] and [Analyzer Settings] dialog boxes.
15.3.1 Opening the IPU settings dialog box
The IPU system and connection settings can be configured in the IPU settings.
Click [Setting] in the screen transition area and select [IPU Setting] to display the [IPU Settings] dialog box.
[Intake And Exhaust
Agitating]
✔ ✔ ✔ - -
Setting menu
[User Authority]
[Administrator]
(Built-in)
[Administrator] [Supervisor]
[Assay
Developer]
[Operator]
Setting menu tree Setting screen area
[IPU Settings] dialog box
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
235/314
⏺ Setting menu tree
This shows the settings. Click an item at the lowest level to display the setting screen on the right.
[IPU Settings]
[Manage settings] You can save, restore, and initialize settings.
(➤P.238 "15.4.1 Manage settings")
[System]
[Facility Information] You can set the name of the facility that is using the system.
(➤P.240 "15.4.2 Facility information")
[System Language] You can set the language used in the system.
(➤P.240 "15.4.3 System language")
[Display] You can configure settings to connect multiple monitors to the IPU to
expand the display region.
(➤P.240 "15.4.4 Display")
[Date Format] You can set the date format used on the IPU screen.
(➤P.241 "15.4.5 Date format")
[User Administration] You can register or delete users of the instrument, set user authority, and
reset passwords.
(➤P.241 "15.4.6 User administration")
[Password
Management]
You can configure password management settings.
(➤P.245 "15.4.7 Password management")
[Account Lockout] You can configure the number of allowed incorrect log-ons and the
duration that a locked-out account will remain locked out.
(➤P.246 "15.4.8 Account Lockout")
[Worklist] You can configure worklist/workitem related settings.
[Worklist]: Select whether to confirm deletion of oldest workitems when
the number of registered workitems exceeds the maximum
number.
(➤P.246 "15.4.9 Worklist")
[Workitem]: Select how secondary ID will be assigned, and whether to
enable editing of the workitem information received from the
host computer or PS-10.
(➤P.247 "15.4.10 Workitem")
[Work Area] You can define number of events to be displayed on a plot.
(➤P.247 "15.4.11 Work Area")
[Validate] You can configure settings related to validating workitems.
[Auto-validate]: Select whether to automatically validate workitem
measurement results after the run.
(➤P.248 "15.4.12 Auto-validate")
[Output] You can configure the settings to automatically export FCS files or various
types of data after validation.
(➤P.249 "15.4.13 Output")
[Security] You can configure screen lock settings and set whether to export patient
information to FCS files.
(➤P.250 "15.4.14 Security settings")
[Connect]
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
236/314
⏺ Setting screen area
The setting screen for the item selected in the setting menu tree appears.
15.3.2 Opening the analyzer settings dialog box
The settings for alarms, instrument nickname, and auto loader can be configured in the analyzer settings.
Click [Setting] in the screen transition area and select [Analyzer Setting] to display the [Analyzer Settings] dialog
box.
[Host Computer] You can configure the host computer connection settings.
(➤P.251 "15.4.15 Host computer")
[PS-10] You can configure the PS-10 connection settings.
(➤P.252 "15.4.16 PS-10")
[Printer] You can configure the graphic printer connection settings.
(➤P.253 "15.4.17 Printer")
[OK] Click to save your setting changes and close the dialog box.
[Cancel] Click to close the dialog box. Your setting changes are not saved.
[Apply] Click to save and immediately apply the changed settings. The dialog box does not
close.
Settings menu tree Settings screen area
[Analyzer Settings] dialog box
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
237/314
⏺ Setting menu tree
This shows the settings. Click an item at the lowest level to open the settings screen for that item on the right.
⏺ Settings screen area
The settings screen for the item selected in the setting menu tree appears.
15.3.3 Opening the version information dialog box
Click [Setting] in the screen transition area and select [Version Information] to check the current version of the
instrument.
[Analyzer Settings]
[Manage settings] You can save, restore, and initialize settings.
(➤P.253 "15.5.1 Manage settings")
[Alarm Sound] Set the alarm sound that notifies the user when an error has occurred.
(➤P.255 "15.5.2 Alarm sound")
[XF-1600]
[Instrument] You can change the instrument nickname. [XF-1600] is displayed by
default.
(➤P.255 "15.5.3 Instrument")
[Auto Loader]
[Intake And
Exhaust Agitating]
You can select whether to automatically agitate the sample in the auto
loader before starting the run.
(➤P.256 "15.5.4 Auto loader")
[OK] Click to save your setting changes and close the dialog box.
[Cancel] Click to close the dialog box. Your setting changes are not saved.
[Apply] Click to save and immediately apply changed settings. The dialog box does not
close.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
238/314
15.4 IPU settings
15.4.1 Manage settings
Click the [IPU Settings] tree in the [IPU Settings] dialog box to display the items below.
* Only [admin] (instrument administrator) can use this setting.
⏺ Saving settings (backup)
The current IPU settings can be saved to a file.
1 Click [Backup].
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
2 Specify the save folder.
3 Enter a file name.
The file extension is ".ini".
4 Click [Save].
The settings are saved.
[Backup] The current settings of the IPU can be saved to a file.
(➤P.238 "⏺ Saving settings (backup)")
[Restore]* Settings saved in a file can be restored (they will replace the current settings).
(➤P.239 "⏺ Restoring backed up settings (restore)")
[Set Default]* The settings in the IPU can be returned to the default settings.
(➤P.239 "⏺ Initializing settings")
Note:
The default file name will be [XF-1600][Software Version][IPUSetting][Date of save_Time of save].ini.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
239/314
⏺ Restoring backed up settings (restore)
Settings can be imported from a saved file. The imported settings will replace the current settings.
1 Click [Restore].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The [Open] dialog box appears.
3 Select the name of the file you want to restore.
The file extension is ".ini".
4 Click [Open].
The settings are replaced.
⏺ Initializing settings
The IPU settings can be returned to the default settings.
1 Click [Set Default].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The settings are initialized.
Information
When settings are restored, the user information settings are also replaced by the restored data. Note that
the [admin] (administrator) password is also replaced by the restored data.
Information
When the settings are initialized, the user information settings are also initialized. Note that the [admin]
(administrator) password also returns to the default setting.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
240/314
15.4.2 Facility information
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Facility Information].
15.4.3 System language
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [System Language].
The new settings will be applied the next time startup or logon is performed.
15.4.4 Display
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Display].
[Facility Name] The facility name can be entered. This name can be up to 32 characters.
[Language] Available display languages are listed in the drop-down menu.
Available languages depend on the software version in use.
[Print Language] Available languages for printing are listed in the drop-down menu.
Available languages depend on the software version in use.
[Single display] Use this setting when connecting one monitor to the IPU.
[Multi-display] Use this setting when connecting two monitors to the IPU.
Note:
• To use the multiple display setting, you must first connect a second monitor to the IPU.
• Change the Windows display settings. Click , [Settings], [System], and [Display] in that order and
select [Extend these displays] from the [Multiple displays] drop-down menu. Restart Windows after
changing the display settings.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
241/314
15.4.5 Date format
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click
[Date Format].
15.4.6 User administration
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [User Administration].
[Date Format] Select one of the following date formats.
[YYYY/MM/DD] Year 4 digits/Month 2 digits/Day 2 digits
[MM/DD/YYYY] Month 2 digits/Day 2 digits/Year 4 digits
[DD/MM/YYYY] Day 2 digits/Month 2 digits/Year 4 digits
[Logon Name] The user name of the logged-on user appears.
[Auto Logon] You can select a user for auto logon.
Registered user list The registered users are displayed. [Logon Name], [User Name], [Status], [Role],
and [User Info.] appear.
[Built-in User], which appears in [User Info.], indicates a factory registered user. A
built-in user cannot be deleted or changed.
Number of registered
users
The number of registered users is displayed.
Registered user
list
Number of
registered users
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
242/314
* You can also double-click the user you want to change in the registered user display list to open the dialog box.
⏺ Changing passwords
1 Click [Change Password].
The dialog box on the right appears.
2 Populate the displayed fields.
3 Click [OK].
The password is changed.
[Change Password] Click to display a dialog box that allows you to change the password.
(➤P.242 "⏺ Changing passwords")
[Modify Settings] Click to display a dialog box that allows you to change user settings.*
(➤P.243 "⏺ Changing settings and adding users")
[Add User] Click to display a dialog box that allows you to add a user. When the maximum
number of users (101) has been registered, additional users cannot be added. This
button is only enabled for users with an [Administrator] role.
(➤P.243 "⏺ Changing settings and adding users")
[Delete User] Click to delete a user. The [admin] (instrument administrator) cannot be deleted. This
button is only enabled for users with an [Administrator] role.
(➤P.244 "⏺ Deleting users")
[Change Status] Click to select the user status between [Enable] or [Disable]. This button is only
enabled for users with an [Administrator] role.
(➤P.244 "⏺ Changing user status")
[Current Password] Enter the current password.
[New Password] Enter the new password.
Up to 127 characters can be entered.
For details on required password settings, see the following:
(➤P.245 "15.4.7 Password management")
[Re-enter New
Password]
Re-enter the new password for confirmation.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
243/314
⏺ Changing settings and adding users
1 Click [Modify Settings] or [Add User].
The following dialog box appears.
2 Populate the displayed fields.
3 Click [OK].
Note:
The maximum number of users that can be registered is 100. This does not include factory-registered users.
[Logon Name] Enter the logon name of the user.
Up to 20 characters can be entered.
[Language] Select the language to be used for the user. For the languages that are available,
see the following:
(➤P.240 "15.4.3 System language")
[User Name] Enter the logon name of the user.
Up to 20 characters can be entered.
[User Info.] Enter additional information related to the user.
Up to 100 characters can be entered.
[User Authority] Select the user’s authority ([Supervisor], [Administrator], [AssayDeveloper], or
[Operator]) from the drop-down menu.
[Reset Password] Click this button to reset the password.
You can set a new password in the dialog box that is displayed when you click this
button. If you chose [Add User] in step 1, this button will not be displayed.
Example: dialog box shown when [Modify Settings] is clicked
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
244/314
4 Enter the password.
Enter the new password (twice).
If settings are being modified, the dialog box on the right
does not appear. Go to the next step.
5 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the settings are changed or the user is added.
⏺ Deleting users
1 Click the user that you want to delete from the list.
The user is selected.
2 Click [Delete User].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
3 Click [Yes].
The selected user is deleted.
⏺ Changing user status
1 Click the user for whom you want to change the user status.
2 Click [Change Status].
The following dialog box appears.
3 Select either [Enable] or [Disable].
4 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes and the settings are changed.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
245/314
15.4.7 Password management
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Password Management].
Note:
Only a user with an [Administrator] role can use this setting.
[Password expiration
date]
Set the period to automatically force users to change their passwords.
Any value from 0 to 999 can be entered.
If you enter 0, the password will not expire and the number field [Prior notification of
password expiration] is disabled.
[Prior notification of
password expiration]
Set the period to notify users before their password expires.
Any value from 1 to 999 can be entered.
[Password minimum
requirements
definition]
The options below are for setting the minimum password length and password
complexity requirements.
[The minimum
number of
characters]
Any value from 1 to 98 can be entered.
[Uppercase
letters]
Checking [Necessary] requires at least one uppercase letter be used in the
password.
[Lowercase
letters]
Checking [Necessary] requires at least one lowercase letter be used in the
password.
[Numbers] Checking [Necessary] requires at least one numeric character be used in the
password.
[Special
characters]
Checking [Necessary] requires at least one special character be used in the
password.
The following special characters can be used:
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
246/314
15.4.8 Account Lockout
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Account Lockout].
15.4.9 Worklist
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Worklist].
[Restrict
predictable
passwords]
Checking [Necessary] requires unpredictable passwords.
If [Necessary] is selected, you cannot set the following passwords:
- A password containing three consecutive characters from the user’s Logon Name
- “XF”
[Threshold] Enter the number of allowed incorrect log-ons entered before the user
account is locked out.
[Duration] Enter the time in minutes that a locked-out account will remain locked out
before the user can try again.
[Confirm deletion of oldest
workitem when registering
more than 10,000 workitems
in the worklist.]
Enabling this setting will cause a confirmation message to be displayed
asking whether you want to delete old workitems when more than 10,000
workitems have been registered in the worklist.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
247/314
15.4.10 Workitem
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Workitem].
15.4.11 Work Area
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Work Area].
[Secondary ID input] Select either [Manual] or [Automatic].
[Manual] Select this button to manually assign a secondary ID.
[Automatic] Select this button to automatically assign a secondary ID.
[Workitem Edit] Click the checkbox to enable editing of workitem information received from
the host computer or the PS-10.
[Number of events displayed
on a plot during acquisition]
From the drop-down menu, select the number of events that will be displayed
on a plot during acquisition.
The available options are [50,000], [100,000], [1,000,000], or [All].
By default, [100,000] is selected.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
248/314
15.4.12 Auto-validate
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Auto-validate].
[Auto validate after
measurement.]
Select to automatically validate a workitem after the measurement.
[Workitems without
hardware errors]
Select to enable the auto-validate function only for a workitem without errors
due to abnormal hardware conditions. If any of these errors occur during the
run, the workitem analysis results cannot be automatically validated to ensure
data integrity.
[Workitems without
hardware errors &
measurement errors]
Select to enable the auto-validate function only for a workitem without errors
due to abnormal hardware conditions or errors related to sample or
acquisition conditions. If any of these errors occur during the run, the
workitem analysis results cannot be automatically validated to ensure data
integrity.
Caution
By using this function, measurement results without hardware/measurement errors can be automatically
validated in the XF-1600 IPU.
Make sure that this setting is enabled only if the XF-1600 in your laboratory is connected to a host
computer and the results will be checked and validated by the host system.
Note:
When [Auto-validate] is activated, you can still manually validate workitems with hardware or measurement
errors, but only after you verify that the data is valid. For manually validating the workitems, see the
following:
(➤P.117 "Chapter 10: 10.10 Validating workitems")
In the above case, you can see the error information in the data (saved in FCS format or exported to the
host computer) or in the report. For details on these errors, see the following:
(➤P.299 "Chapter 18: 18.3 Causes of errors and remedial actions")
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
249/314
15.4.13 Output
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Output].
[Auto FCS Output]
[Auto FCS File is output
after Workitem is
validated.]
Select to automatically export an FCS file when the workitem is validated.
[Auto FCS File is output
after Cytometer QC
result registration.]
Select to automatically export an FCS file after daily QC measurement or
baseline measurement for cytometer QC.
[Output Folder] Click [Select] and specify the save location. If you want to create a new folder,
click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box. After clicking [OK], the selected
location is displayed in the field next to [Output Folder].
[Auto Host Output]
[Auto Host Output after
Validation.]
Select to automatically export workitem data to the host computer after
validation.
[Auto Report Output]
[Auto Report Output
after Validation.]
Select to automatically export a report when the workitem is validated. Select
either [Output to printer] or [Output file in PDF format] depending on how you
want to output the report.
[Output Folder] Click [Select] and specify the save location. If you want to create a new folder,
click [Make New Folder] in the dialog box. After clicking [OK], the selected
location is displayed in the field next to [Output Folder].
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
250/314
15.4.14 Security settings
Click [System] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box and click [Security].
[IPU Screen Lock]
[Use IPU screen lock
timer]
Select to lock the screen after a certain amount of time has passed without
any user operation.
[Time until IPU screen
lock]
Specify time interval after which to lock the screen. You can set a value
between 15 and 60 minutes.
[Analysis Data]
[Output patient
information]
Select to include patient information when exporting FCS files.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
251/314
15.4.15 Host computer
Click [Connect] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box, and click [Host Computer].
After changing the settings, click [OK] in the [IPU Settings] dialog box.
The changed settings will be saved.
[Host Computer
Connection]
Select to enable connection to the host computer.
This must be selected to configure connection settings.
[Current Connection] Select [Host Computer 1] or [Host Computer 2].
Connection is only possible to 1 host computer. Up to 2 host computers can be
registered.
Tabs Click to display the connection settings of [Host Computer 1] or [Host Computer 2].
[Host Computer Name] Enter the name of the host computer.
You can enter up to 8 characters.
[TCP/IP Connection] Select to connect to the host computer by TCP/IP. Detailed settings can be configured.
[Host IP Address] Set the IP address of the host computer.
[Port No.] Set the port number of the host computer.
A value from 0 to 65535 can be entered.
[Format] Select the TCP/IP communication format.
Tabs
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
252/314
15.4.16 PS-10
Click [Connect] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box, and click [PS-10].
[PS-10 Connection] Select to enable connection to the PS-10.
This must be selected to configure connection settings.
[TCP/IP Connection] Configure the settings to connect to the PS-10 by TCP/IP.
[PS-10 IP Address] Set the IP address of the PS-10.
[Port No.] Set the port number of the PS-10.
A value from 0 to 65535 can be entered.
[Communication
Protocol]
Select the TCP/IP communication format from the drop-down menu.
[Timeout] Set the timeout for communications with the PS-10.
The minimum and maximum settings are 5 sec. and 120 sec., respectively.
The default setting is 30 sec.
Information
Before transferring data from the PS-10 to the XF-1600, make sure that the "Panel" and "Test" names for
the secondary tubes from the PS-10 are registered under the [Panel Master] tab of the XF-1600 IPU.
The "Panel" / "Test" names from the PS-10 must match the [Panel Name] / [Subset Panel Name]
respectively on the XF-1600 IPU.
If either name does not match between the XF-1600 and the PS-10, the data from the PS-10 will not be
successfully imported into the XF-1600.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
253/314
15.4.17 Printer
Click [Connect] in the [IPU Settings] tree of the [IPU Settings] dialog box,
and click [Printer].
15.5 Analyzer settings
15.5.1 Manage settings
Click [Manage Settings] in the [Analyzer Settings] tree of the [Analyzer Settings] dialog box to display the items below.
* Only [admin] (instrument administrator) can use this setting.
⏺ Save settings
The current analyzer settings can be saved to a file.
1 Click [Backup].
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
2 Specify the save folder.
[Report (GP) Connect] Select to connect to a graphic printer.
[Backup] The settings can be saved to a file.
(➤P.253 "⏺ Save settings")
[Restore]* Settings saved in a file can be restored (they will replace the current settings).
(➤P.254 "⏺ Restoring backed up settings (restore)")
[Set Default]* The settings can be returned to the default settings.
(➤P.254 "⏺ Initializing settings")
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
254/314
3 Enter the file name.
The file extension is ".ini".
4 Click [Save].
The settings are saved.
⏺ Restoring backed up settings (restore)
Settings can be imported from a saved file. The imported settings will replace the current settings.
1 Click [Restore].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The [Open] dialog box appears.
3 Select the name of the file you want to restore.
The file extension is ".ini".
4 Click [Open].
The settings are restored.
⏺ Initializing settings
The analyzer settings can be returned to the default settings.
1 Click [Set Default].
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The settings are initialized.
Note:
The default file name will be [XF-1600][Software Version][AnalyzerSetting][Date of save_Time of save].ini.
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
255/314
15.5.2 Alarm sound
You can set the alarm sound that alerts users to an error.
Click [Alarm Sound] in the [Analyzer Settings] tree of the [Analyzer Settings] dialog box.
15.5.3 Instrument
You can define the instrument nickname.
Click [XF-1600] in the [Analyzer Settings] tree in the [Analyzer Settings] dialog box and click [Instrument].
[Alarm Type] Set the alarm from the 3 available types.
[Warning] Set how the alarm sound is played when a warning error has occurred. [No Alarm],
[Once], or [Loop] can be selected.
[Stops Analysis] Set how the alarm sound is played when an error that forces analysis to stop has
occurred. [No Alarm], [Once], or [Loop] can be selected.
Play button Click to listen to the selected alarm sound.
Stop button Click to stop the alarm sound.
[Instrument ID] The instrument ID is displayed in the format of "Instrument Product Name Serial
Number".
This format cannot be changed.
[Instrument
Nickname]
Type the name into the field.
[XF-1600] is displayed by default.
Play buttons Stop buttons
Chapter 15 User settings
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
256/314
15.5.4 Auto loader
Click [XF-1600] in the [Analyzer Settings] tree of the [Analyzer Settings] dialog box and click [Intake And
Exhaust Agitating].
[Intake and Exhaust
Agitation before
starting Auto Loader
measurement.]
Select to automatically agitate the sample in the auto loader before starting the run.
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
257/314
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
This chapter explains how to view logs.
16.1 Logs
You can view the following logs:
• [Audit Log]: Displays a log of operations performed.
• [Error Log]: Displays a log of errors that occurred, including when each error occurred and when
each error was cleared.
• [Reagent Replacement Log]: Displays a log of reagents replaced and information entered at the time of
replacement.
• [Maintenance Log]: Displays a log of maintenance tasks executed and related information.
16.1.1 Viewing a log
Follow the steps below to view a log.
1 Click [History] in the screen transition area.
The screen on the right appears.
Note:
Up to 5,000 logs can be saved. Once 5,000 logs are saved, each new log automatically deletes the oldest
log.
[Audit Log] screen
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
258/314
2 Click the tab of the log you want to view.
The log appears.
3 View the log.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.260 "16.2 History screen")
16.1.2 Specifying display conditions for the log list (filter)
You can specify conditions for the logs you want to display in the log list.
1 Click (Filter) in the command buttons area.
The [Filter] dialog box appears.
2 Populate the displayed fields.
The following items are displayed in the dialog box.
[Use Filter] Select to display only log entries that match the specified conditions.
[Specify Date] Select to filter by date.
[Starting Day]/[Ending Day] Click to select [Today], [Yesterday], or [Specify].
Selecting [Specify] allows you to specify the date. Enter the date in the
field below [Specify].
You can also click the button on the right edge of the field to display a
calendar from which you can select a date.
[Specify Logon Name] Select to specify the data to be displayed by logon name.
Click to select the logon name to be displayed. You can only select one
user.
Example: [Filter] dialog box on the [Error Log] tab
Condition
specification
area
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
259/314
3 Click [OK].
The dialog box closes.
The log entries that match the specified conditions are then displayed in the log list.
16.1.3 Saving a log in CSV format
The log list can be saved as a file in CSV format.
1 Click (Output CSV File) in the command buttons area.
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
2 Specify the save folder.
3 Enter the file name.
The file extension is ".csv".
4 Click [Save].
The CSV data is saved.
Condition specification area The buttons that appear depend on the screen displayed.
Select the checkbox for the button at the top to use the condition shown for
that button.
Below each button, items that can be selected for each condition are
displayed.
[Specify Operation] This appears when the [Audit Log] screen is open.
Select to filter the displayed data by operation name.
Select from the items below [Specify Operation] to display the selected
operation names. You can select multiple operation names.
[Specify Error] This appears when the [Error Log] screen is open.
Select to filter the displayed data by error type.
Select the checkbox below [Specify Error] to display the selected error
type. You can select multiple error types.
[Specify Maintenance] This appears when the [Maintenance Log] screen is open.
Select to filter the displayed data by maintenance type.
Select the checkbox below [Specify Maintenance] to display the selected
maintenance type. You can select multiple maintenance types.
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
260/314
16.2 History screen
⏺ Command buttons area
Buttons for the functions below are displayed.
⏺ Tabs
You can click a tab to change the screen.
(Comment) Select an entry and click this icon to display a dialog box that allows you to enter a
comment.
You can enter up to 50 characters in total. Once a comment is entered, it cannot be
edited or deleted.
If a comment is entered when another comment already exists, the new comment is
added after the existing comment.
(Filter) Click to display a dialog box that allows you to specify conditions for the data you
want to display in the log list.
(➤P.258 "16.1.2 Specifying display conditions for the log list (filter)")
(Output CSV File) Click to display a dialog box to export log entries in CSV format.
(➤P.259 "16.1.3 Saving a log in CSV format")
Command buttons area
Tabs
History screen ([Audit Log] screen)
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
261/314
16.2.1 Contents of the log list
The items shown in the log list vary depending on which tab is selected.
⏺ [Audit Log] screen
This screen shows a log of the operations that have been performed using the instrument, and relevant
information.
A maximum of 5,000 entries are stored and displayed in the audit log.
⏺ [Error Log] screen
Displays a log of the errors that occurred, including the times each error occurred and was cleared.
A maximum of 5,000 entries are stored and displayed in the error log.
For details on errors, see the following:
(➤P.295 "Chapter 18 Troubleshooting")
[Date] Displays the date and time the log was registered.
[Logon Name] Displays the name of the user who was logged on when the log was registered.
[Operation Name] Displays the name of the operation that was performed.
[Details] Displays details of the operation that was performed.
[Comments] Displays entered comments.
If you want to add a comment, select the entry and double-click or press the Enter
key to display a dialog box that allows you to enter the comment.
You can enter up to 50 characters. Once a comment is entered, it cannot be edited
or deleted. If a comment is entered when another comment already exists, the new
comment is added after the existing comment.
[Date] Displays the date and time the log was registered.
[Logon Name] Displays the name of the user who was logged on when the log was registered.
[Status] Displays the status of the error that occurred.
[Occurred]: Error in effect
[Clear]: Error cleared
[Error] Displays the error message.
[Error Code] Displays the error code.
[Parameter 1]/
[Parameter 2]
Displays parameters 1 and 2 of the error that occurred.
Depending on the type of error, this field may be blank.
[Comments] Displays entered comments.
If you want to add a comment, select the entry and double-click or press the Enter
key to display a dialog box that allows you to enter the comment.
You can enter up to 50 characters. Once a comment is entered, it cannot be edited
or deleted. If a comment is entered when another comment already exists, the new
comment is added after the existing comment.
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
262/314
⏺ [Reagent Replacement Log] screen
Displays a log of reagents replaced and information entered at the time of replacement.
A maximum of 5,000 entries are stored and displayed in the reagent replacement log.
For details on reagent replacement, see the following:
(➤P.270 "Chapter 17: 17.5 Replacing reagents")
[Date] Displays the date and time the log was registered.
[Logon Name] Displays the name of the user who was logged on when the log was registered.
[Reagent] Displays the name of the replaced reagent.
[Lot No.] Displays the lot number of the replaced reagent.
[Serial No.] Displays the serial number within the lot of the replaced reagent.
[Exp. Date] Displays the expiration date of the replaced reagent.
[Exp. date after
opening]
Displays the shelf life of the replaced reagent after it has been opened.
[Amounts] Displays the volume of the replaced reagent.
[Entry Type] Displays the method of input used for the replaced reagent.
[Manual]: Manual
[Barcode]: Barcode reader
[ProductCode] Displays the entered product code.
[Manufacturer] Displays the entered manufacturer.
[Address] Displays the entered manufacturer's address.
[Comments] Displays entered comments.
If you want to add a comment, select the entry and double-click or press the Enter
key to display a dialog box that allows you to enter the comment.
You can enter up to 50 characters. Once a comment is entered, it cannot be edited
or deleted. If a comment is entered when another comment already exists, the new
comment is added after the existing comment.
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
263/314
⏺ [Maintenance Log] screen
Displays a log of maintenance tasks executed and related information.
A maximum of 5,000 entries are stored and displayed in the maintenance log.
A maintenance log is registered when one of the maintenance tasks below is performed.
The [Maintenance] and [Maintenance Property] items that appear are below.
[Date] Displays the date and time the log was registered.
[Logon Name] Displays the name of the user who was logged on when the log was registered.
[Maintenance] Displays the name of the executed maintenance task.
[Maintenance Property] Displays the property of the executed maintenance task.
[Comments] Displays entered comments.
If you want to add a comment, select the entry and double-click or press the Enter
key to display a dialog box that allows you to enter the comment.
You can enter up to 50 characters. Once a comment is entered, it cannot be edited
or deleted. If a comment is entered when another comment already exists, the new
comment is added after the existing comment.
[Maintenance] [Maintenance Property]
[Auto Rinse] [As needed]
[Cleaning] [As needed]
[Shutdown] [Daily]
[Drain Waste Fluid Chamber] [As needed]
[Drain Wash Chamber] [As needed]
[Remove Flowcell Air Bubbles] [As needed]
[Rinse Flowcell] [As needed]
[Reagent Replenishment] [As needed]
Chapter 16 Viewing logs
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
264/314
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
265/314
Chapter 17 Maintenance
This chapter describes the procedures for maintenance, replacing, and replenishing supplies, and checking
instrument operation.
17.1 List of maintenance tasks
To maintain optimal instrument performance, periodic maintenance must be performed.
When using the instrument on a continuous basis, execute daily maintenance every 24 hours.
Perform maintenance according to the schedule below. Record the maintenance tasks that are performed in the
maintenance and inspection checklist. (➤P.294 "17.16 Maintenance and inspection checklist")
Risk of infection
While working, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such as protective gloves, a
protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Wash your hands with antiseptic solution after
completing each task.
There is a risk of infection.
Caution
If the instrument will not be used for an extended time, perform instrument startup and shutdown once
every two weeks to keep the system in good working order.
Instrument startup and shutdown rinses the hydraulic system. There is a risk of incorrect results if the
instrument is not started for an extended time.
Note:
• To perform maintenance, the analyzer must be in the ready state. Otherwise, maintenance cannot be
performed. Analysis cannot be performed during maintenance.
• If an error occurs that requires maintenance, the [Help] dialog box appears on the IPU screen. Perform
the necessary maintenance work as instructed in the message shown in the [Action] field of the [Help]
dialog box.
For details on the [Help] dialog box, see the following:
(➤P.298 "Chapter 18: 18.2 [Help] dialog box")
Maintenance task Page
Daily maintenance Shutdown ➤P.53
Maintenance once every two years Replacing the air pump ➤P.286
As needed Replacing the waste container ➤P.268
Rinsing the flowcell ➤P.275
Removing air bubbles from the flowcell ➤P.275
Replenishing a reagent ➤P.280
Replacing a reagent ➤P.270
Replacing a fuse ➤P.292
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
266/314
17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu
You can perform specific maintenance tasks, operation checks, and operation tests from the maintenance menu.
1 Click [Maintenance] in the screen transition area.
The maintenance menu appears.
You can click the icons in the maintenance menu to execute the functions below.
[Auto Rinse] Executes automatic rinsing of the analyzer and the post-rinse background
check.
(➤P.269 "17.4 Executing auto rinse")
[Shutdown] Shuts down the instrument.
[Reagent Replacement] Replaces the reagent.
(➤P.270 "17.5 Replacing reagents")
[Cleaning] Executes cleaning.
(➤P.273 "17.6 Cleaning")
[Drain Waste Fluid Chamber] Drains the waste fluid that has collected in the waste fluid chamber.
[Drain Wash Chamber] Drains sample fluid that has collected in the wash chamber.
[Remove Flowcell Air Bubbles] Removes bubbles from the flowcell.
(➤P.275 "17.7 Removing air bubbles from the flowcell")
[Rinse Flowcell] Rinses the flowcell.
(➤P.275 "17.8 Rinsing the flowcell")
[Air Pump Test] Starts an air pump test.
(➤P.277 "17.9.1 Air pump test")
[Pinch Valve Test] Starts a pinch valve test.
(➤P.278 "17.9.2 Pinch valve test")
[Sample Aspiration Motor Test] Starts a sample aspiration motor test.
(➤P.278 "17.9.3 Sample aspiration motor test")
[Sheath Motor Test] Starts a sheath motor test.
(➤P.278 "17.9.4 Sheath motor test")
[Aspiration Unit Motor Test] Starts an aspiration unit motor test.
(➤P.278 "17.9.5 Aspiration unit motor test")
Maintenance menu
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
267/314
[Tube Holder Motor Test] Starts a sample tube holder motor test.
(➤P.279 "17.9.6 Tube holder motor test")
[Auto Loader Motor Test] Starts an auto loader motor test.
(➤P.279 "17.9.7 Auto loader motor test")
[Reagent Replenishment] Replaces the reagent in the fluid line.
(➤P.280 "17.10 Replenishing the reagent")
[Counter] Checks analysis counts and cycle counts of units.
(➤P.281 "17.11 Checking the cycle counter")
[Sensor Display] Checks the status of each unit.
(➤P.283 "17.12 Checking the instrument status (sensors)")
[Barcode Reader Test] Starts a barcode reader test.
(➤P.285 "17.13 Barcode reader test")
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
268/314
17.3 Replacing the waste container
If you are using the waste container full sensor and the waste container becomes full, [Waste tank is full] will appear
in the [Help] dialog box on the IPU screen. Promptly replace the waste container.
1 Make sure that the analysis status indicator LED is not blinking.
If the LED is blinking, wait for it to light up continuously.
Make sure that the alarm is turned off by clicking [Reset Alarm] in the [Help] dialog box or pressing any key on
the keyboard.
2 Prepare an empty waste container and remove the cap.
The opening must be on the top of the container and horizontal.
This step is not necessary if the full waste container is to be emptied and reused.
3 Remove the liquid waste cap with the float switch from the full waste
container.
Twist the cap to which the tubes are connected in the
direction indicated (counterclockwise) and remove it along
with the float switch.
The float switch and the inside of the liquid waste cap may
have been in contact with the waste.
Ensure that it does not cause any contamination in the
laboratory.
4 Insert the float switch of the liquid waste cap carefully into the empty waste
container.
Risk of infection
• While working, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such as protective gloves, a
protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Wash your hands with antiseptic solution after
completing the task. There is a risk of infection.
• Take care that the waste fluid does not spill out of the container.
Risk of infection
Do not replace the waste container while the instrument is running.
Waste fluid can spray out of the tube and onto your skin or clothes, causing a risk of infection by pathogens
or other contaminants.
Cap
Float switch
Waste container
The illustration is an example.
The container supplied to you may vary.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
269/314
5 Tighten the liquid waste cap by turning it clockwise.
6 Attach the cap from the empty container to the full waste container.
This step is not necessary if the full waste container has been emptied and reused.
7 Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
The [Help] dialog box closes and the status indicator LED turns green.
17.4 Executing auto rinse
Rinsing of the analyzer and a background check after rinsing can be executed as a single operation.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Auto Rinse].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you
click it, the dialog box on the right appears. Progress is
shown in the progress bar.
Wait until the process finishes. The dialog box will automatically close and a background check will start.
For details on background checks, see the following:
(➤P.52 "Chapter 8: 8.2.3 Executing an analyzer self-test")
Risk of infection
Immediately dispose of the waste fluid according to local laws and regulations.
Caution
Install the waste container below the bottom of the instrument.
[Auto Rinse] dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
270/314
17.5 Replacing reagents
When a reagent must be replaced, an error message is displayed. Promptly replace the indicated reagent.
17.5.1 [Reagent Replacement] dialog box
The [Reagent Replacement] dialog box allows you to check how much reagent remains and to replace
reagents.
If a reagent runs out during analysis, analysis is paused, and an error message appears in the status area.
Display the [Reagent Replacement] dialog box to replace the reagent.
1 Displaying the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Reagent Replacement].
The [Reagent Replacement] dialog box
showing the reagent level is displayed.
Note:
Even if an error message does not appear, click [Maintenance] in the screen transition area, and click
[Reagent Replacement] to open the [Reagent Replacement] dialog box.
Reagent state
[Reagent Replacement] dialog box
Reagent name
Lot No.
Shelf life after
opening
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
271/314
17.5.2 Replacing the reagent
For cautions when replacing reagents, refer to the reagent’s package insert.
1 Prepare the new reagent.
Make sure that the reagent has not expired.
2 Display the [Reagent Replacement] dialog box.
• If no error message is displayed, see the following:
(➤P.270 "17.5.1 [Reagent Replacement] dialog box")
• If an error message is displayed:
Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The [Reagent Replacement] dialog box appears.
3 Input the reagent code (barcode) of the new reagent.
Inputting by reading the barcode
Scan the reagent code (barcode) on the outer box of the new
reagent with the hand-held barcode reader.
The reagent code is as shown at right.
If the barcode surface is curled, flatten before reading.
When the reagent code is input, the reagent state in the dialog box shows [Received].
The lot number and expiration date change to the lot number and expiration date of the
new reagent.
Shelf life after opening Displays the shelf life of the reagent after opening. This is not displayed if
the reagent has not been registered. If already expired, the shelf life after
opening appears in white on a red background.
Lot No. Displays the lot number of the reagent.
Reagent state During reagent replacement, progress is indicated as "0 to 100 %".
Reagent name Displays the reagent name.
Caution
• Place the reagent container at a level no more than 1 meter above or below the bottom of the analyzer. Do not place a
reagent container on top of the instrument.
• The new reagent must be allowed to sit for at least 24 hours at room temperature (18 °C to 28 °C) before use.
• If a reagent spills, immediately wipe up the spill using a moistened cloth.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
272/314
4 Remove the cap from the new reagent container.
5 Remove the cap of the old reagent container.
6 Pull the spout set straight up and out.
7 Insert the spout set straight into the new reagent container and close the cap.
8 Click [Execute].
Reagent replacement starts. Wait until the process finishes. When the process finishes, the dialog box closes
automatically.
Note:
If you are manually entering the reagent code, click the name
of the reagent to be replaced in the [Reagent Replacement]
dialog box. The dialog box on the right appears.
Select the [Replace the reagent] checkbox, enter the
[Reagent Code:], and click [OK]. Then follow the instructions
in the dialog box to register the reagent information.
Caution
Do not touch the aspiration nozzle on the spout set. Take care that dust does not get on the spout set.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
273/314
Time guidelines for reagent replacement are shown below.
17.6 Cleaning
Clean the fluid paths in the instrument using CyFlow CLEAN. Cleaning must be performed every 100 measurements
or every 7 days.
An error message appears if the cleaning has not been performed beyond this period.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [Manual]. If the mode is
set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
2 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "Chapter 17: 17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
This step is not necessary if the [Cleaning] dialog box is already displayed.
Go to step 4.
3 Click [Cleaning].
The dialog box on the right appears.
4 Dispense CyFlow CLEAN into a sample tube.
The amount of CyFlow CLEAN required for executing cleaning is approximately 2.5 mL. Make sure that CyFlow
CLEAN has not expired.
Reagent name Time
CyFlow SHEATH About 1 minute
Warning
CyFlow CLEAN is a strong alkali. Do not mix it with any acidic substances.
[Cleaning] dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
274/314
5 Place CyFlow CLEAN in the sample tube holder.
Place it in the front holder, when you face the analyzer.
Make sure that the tube is uncapped.
6 Press the manual analysis start switch on the analyzer.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer and
aspiration begins. When aspiration finishes, cleaning starts,
and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
7 Remove CyFlow CLEAN.
8 Wait until cleaning finishes.
When the process finishes, auto rinse starts automatically.
(➤P.269 "Chapter 17: 17.4 Executing auto rinse")
Wait until it is complete. When the process finishes, the dialog box closes automatically.
Caution
• When handling CyFlow CLEAN, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such as protective
gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat.
• Take care that the fluid does not spill.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
275/314
17.7 Removing air bubbles from the flowcell
If air bubbles form in the flowcell, remove them following the procedure below.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Remove Flowcell Air Bubbles].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the process finishes, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.8 Rinsing the flowcell
If the flowcell clogs or becomes dirty, rinse the flowcell.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [Manual]. If the mode is
set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
2 Make sure that the instrument is in the ready state.
If the analysis status LED/instrument status shown
in the bottom left corner of the IPU screen does not
light green, wait until it does.
3 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
Analysis status
indicator LED
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
276/314
4 Click [Rinse Flowcell].
The dialog box on the right appears.
5 Dispense CyFlow CLEAN into a sample tube.
The amount of CyFlow CLEAN required for rinsing the flowcell is approximately 2.5 mL. Make sure that CyFlow
CLEAN has not expired.
6 Place CyFlow CLEAN in the sample tube holder.
Place it in the front holder, when you face the
analyzer.
Make sure that the tube is uncapped.
Warning
CyFlow CLEAN is a strong alkali. Do not mix it with any acidic substances.
Caution
• When handling CyFlow CLEAN, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such as protective
gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat.
• Take care that the fluid does not spill.
[Rinse Flowcell] dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
277/314
7 Press the manual analysis start switch on the analyzer.
The sample tube holder retracts into the analyzer and aspiration begins. When aspiration finishes, cleaning
starts, and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
8 Remove CyFlow CLEAN.
9 Wait until cleaning finishes.
When the process finishes, the dialog box closes.
17.9 Testing instrument operations
The operation of the following units can be individually tested. These procedures can be used to identify the cause of
an error.
To execute an operation test, the analyzer must be in the ready state. Operation tests cannot be executed in any
other state. Analysis cannot be performed while an operation test is in progress.
17.9.1 Air pump test
An air pump test starts the air pump and tests its operation.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Air Pump Test].
A dialog box appears, and the air pump test begins. Wait until the process finishes. When the test finishes
normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
278/314
17.9.2 Pinch valve test
Pinch valves are located in the waste chamber and rinse cup aspiration unit.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Pinch Valve Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.9.3 Sample aspiration motor test
This tests sample aspiration and dispensing by the sample aspiration motor.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Sample Aspiration Motor Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.9.4 Sheath motor test
This tests delivery of the sample to the FCM detector by the sheath motor.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Sheath Motor Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.9.5 Aspiration unit motor test
This tests moving of the sample aspiration pipette by the aspiration unit motor.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
279/314
2 Click [Aspiration Unit Motor Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.9.6 Tube holder motor test
This tests the moving of a sample tube holder by the tube holder motor.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [Manual]. If the mode is
set to [AutoLoader], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [Manual] and the sample tube holder is automatically ejected.
2 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
3 Click [Tube Holder Motor Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes, the dialog box closes automatically.
17.9.7 Auto loader motor test
This tests the moving of the auto loader by the auto loader motor.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [AutoLoader]. If the
mode is set to [Manual], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [AutoLoader] mode.
2 Make sure that the auto loader is closed.
3 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
4 Click [Auto Loader Motor Test].
The maintenance name appears in the status area. If you click it, the dialog box appears. Wait until the process
finishes. When the test finishes normally, the dialog box closes automatically.
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
280/314
17.10 Replenishing the reagent
If an incorrect reagent is accidentally connected, the reagent in the fluid line should be replenished.
1 Make sure that the correct reagent is connected.
2 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
3 Click [Reagent Replenishment].
The dialog box on the right appears.
4 Select the checkbox of the reagent you want to replenish and click [Execute].
Reagent replenishment starts. Progress is shown in the progress bar on the screen. Wait until the process
finishes. When the process finishes, the dialog box closes automatically.
[Reagent Replenishment] dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
281/314
17.11 Checking the cycle counter
You can check the analysis count of each analysis mode and the cycle count of each unit (or for the laser, the oscillation
time).
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Counter].
The dialog box on the right appears.
Note:
Cycle counts and analysis counts are for reference only. The counts cannot be reset.
Shortcut buttons These buttons are used to display the dialog boxes that appear in the
[Counter] dialog box.
Click a button of a dialog box that does not currently appear to display the
dialog box.
[Measurement Mode Counter] Displays the analysis counts.
Next button Click to display the [Counter] ([Unit]) dialog box.
Shortcut buttons
Next button
[Counter] ([Measurement]) dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
282/314
3 Click the Next button.
The dialog box on the right appears.
4 If you reset the air pump counter, click [Save].
The reset information is saved.
5 Click [Close].
The dialog box closes.
[Unit Counter] Displays the cycle count of each unit (for the laser, the oscillation time).
[Air Pump Reset] Resets the air pump cycle counter to “0”.
Back button Click to display the [Counter] ([Measurement]) dialog box.
Back button
[Counter] ([Unit]) dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
283/314
17.12 Checking the instrument status (sensors)
You can check the pressure, temperature, laser currents, and sensor status of each unit. The displayed information is
updated every 0.5 seconds.
To display this information, you can also execute analysis with the [Sensor Display] dialog box open.
1 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
2 Click [Sensor Display].
The dialog box on the right appears.
Shortcut buttons These buttons are used to display the dialog boxes that appear in the
[Sensor Display] dialog box.
Click a button of a dialog box that does not currently appear to display the
dialog box.
[Pressure (units: MPa)] Displays the pressure of each unit.
[Temperature (units: °C)] Displays the temperature of each instrument unit and the ambient
temperature.
[Laser Current, Laser Power] Displays the output current and power of the laser.
Next button Click to display the [Sensor Display] (Sensor 2) dialog box.
Shortcut buttons
Next button
[Sensor Display] (Sensor 1) dialog box
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
284/314
3 Click the Next button.
The dialog box on the right appears.
4 Click [Close].
The dialog box closes.
Sensor status display area Displays the status of each sensor.
Red: ON
White: OFF
Back button Click to display the [Sensor Display] (Sensor 1) dialog box.
Back button
[Sensor Display] (Sensor 2) dialog box
Sensor status display area
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
285/314
17.13 Barcode reader test
When a barcode read error occurs, execute the barcode reader test to identify the cause of the error.
1 Make sure that the analysis mode of the status area is [AutoLoader]. If the
mode is set to [Manual], press the mode switch.
The mode changes to [AutoLoader] mode.
2 Make sure that the auto loader is closed.
3 Display the maintenance menu.
(➤P.266 "17.2 Displaying the maintenance menu")
4 Click [Barcode Reader Test].
The [Barcode Reader Test] dialog box appears.
5 Open the auto loader.
6 Install the rotor.
7 Close the auto loader.
8 Click [Start].
The reading test starts.
If a previous test result was displayed, it is cleared when the test starts.
Wait until the process finishes. When reading finishes, the result is displayed.
9 Check the reading results as displayed on the [Barcode Reader Test] dialog box.
[Rotor No.] Displays the rotor number that was read from the barcode.
[CD] Displays the check digit of the barcode.
Reading result
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
286/314
10 Click [Cancel].
The dialog box closes.
11 Open the auto loader.
12 Remove the rotor.
13 Close the auto loader.
17.14 Replacing the air pump
The air pump must be replaced once every 500 hours of operating time, or once every two years, whichever occurs
first. Continuing to use an old air pump may result in air pump failure and other problems.
When [Replace air pump.] appears, promptly replace the air pump.
A replacement air pump is not included with the instrument. Please contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative to purchase a replacement air pump.
Use the following air pump:
1 Shut down the instrument.
For the shutdown procedure, see Chapter 8.
(➤P.53 "Chapter 8: 8.3 Shutdown")
[Type] Displays the type of barcode.
Reading result Displays the reading result.
One of the following symbols is displayed, depending on the result:
If there was no problem with the reading, nothing is displayed.
[E]: Reading error or invalid check digit.
[+]: A value that is longer than the specified number of digits was read.
[-]: A value that is shorter than the specified number of digits was read.
Caution, Hot
The surface of the air pump is hot. After turning off the main power switch on the analyzer, make sure that
the air pump has cooled sufficiently before replacing it.
Product code Item name
05104711 Air pump set No. 1
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
287/314
2 Turn off the main power switch of the analyzer.
3 Unplug the power cable.
For more information about the power cable plug positions, see Chapter 3.
(➤P.29 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Analyzer")
4 Loosen the screws (x2) with a Phillips head screwdriver.
Loosen the screws until about 4-5 mm of the thread
is exposed.
Main power switch
Screws (x2)
Right cover
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
288/314
5 Pull the right cover toward you and insert your hand into the gap between the
cover and the rear of the instrument.
6 Slide the right cover slightly toward the rear of the instrument.
Verify that the loosened screws are in location (1).
7 Pull the right cover toward you.
Verify that the loosened screws are in location (1).
Right cover
(1)
Right cover
(1)
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
289/314
8 Remove the right cover while sliding it toward the rear of the instrument.
9 Loosen the screws (x2) with a Phillips head screwdriver.
Caution
Take care not to drop the screws.
It may be difficult to recover a screw that falls into the instrument.
Right cover
Screws (x2)
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
290/314
10 Pull the air pump unit up.
11 Disconnect the connector and tubes (x2) and remove the air pump unit.
12 Attach the connector and tubes (x2) to the new air pump.
See the illustration in step 11.
13 Place the air pump unit in the instrument and fasten with the screws (x2)
using a Phillips head screwdriver.
14 Reattach the right cover and tighten the screws (x2) with a Phillips head
screwdriver.
Information
Connect the tube (P1) to the upper tube connector.
Air pump unit
Tube (P1)
Tube (V1)
Connector
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
291/314
15 Plug in the power cable.
For more information about the power cable plug positions, see Chapter 3.
(➤P.29 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Analyzer")
16 Turn on the main power switch of the analyzer.
17 Turn on the instrument power.
For the procedure to start up the instrument, see Chapter 8. (➤P.50 "Chapter 8: 8.2 Startup")
18 Reset the air pump cycle counter.
Display the [Counter] ([Unit]) dialog box, and then click [Air Pump Reset]. For details, see the following:
(➤P.281 "17.11 Checking the cycle counter")
Main power switch
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
292/314
17.15 Replacing a fuse
If a fuse blows, follow the steps below to replace it.
Use the following fuse:
1 Turn off the main power switch of the analyzer.
2 Unplug the power cable.
For the locations of the power cable plug and fuses, see the
following:
(➤P.29 "Chapter 3: 3.1 Analyzer")
Warning
• Always unplug the power cable before replacing a fuse.
There is a risk of electrical shock.
• Use only a fuse of the specified type and rating.
There is a risk of smoke emission.
Product code Item name Rating Type Count
26677681 Fuse 50T100H 250 V, 10 A Time lag 2
Main power switch
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
293/314
3 Remove the old fuse.
1 On the rear of the unit, pinch the tabs of the fuse holder and pull out.
2 Remove the old fuse from the fuse
holder.
4 Place the new fuse in the fuse holder and insert the fuse holder into the
instrument.
5 Plug in the power cable.
6 Turn on the main power switch of the analyzer.
7 Turn on the instrument power.
For the procedure for starting the instrument, see the following:
(➤P.50 "Chapter 8: 8.2 Startup")
Fuses
Fuse holder
Tabs
Main power switch
Chapter 17 Maintenance
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
294/314
17.16 Maintenance and inspection checklist
Daily maintenance tasks
Maintenance tasks to be performed once every 2 years Reagent and supply part replacement
Maintenance task
Shutdown
Day
Signed
Rinse the flowcell
Remove air bubbles from the flowcell
Replenish reagent
Replace the waste container
Example:
We recommend that you prepare a checklist that suits your operating environment.
Maintenance task M/D Signed M/D Signed
Replace a fuse
Replace reagent (CyFlow SHEATH)
Replace the air pump
Maintenance task M/D Signed M/D Signed
Maintenance task M/D Signed M/D Signed
Replace the air pump
Maintenance tasks to be performed as needed
Month Yr.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
295/314
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the errors that may occur in the instrument and how to troubleshoot them.
18.1 Error message list (in alphabetical order)
The following is a list of error messages in alphabetical order.
Note:
In any of the following situations turn off the power:
• An error message marked with ☎ (phone icon) appears.
• The error persists after the indicated action is taken.
In these cases, instrument repair or replacement of parts is necessary. Please contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
Error Message Action
Numeric [-0.03MPa pressure error] ⇒ 299
[0.06MPa pressure error] ⇒ 299
☎ [405 nm laser life] ⇒ 303
☎ [405 nm laser output error] ⇒ 303
☎ [488 nm laser life] ⇒ 303
☎ [488 nm laser output error] ⇒ 303
☎ [638 nm laser life] ⇒ 303
☎ [638 nm laser output error] ⇒ 303
A [Abnormal pressure loss] ⇒ 299
[Ambient temperature error (high temperature)] ⇒ 299
[Ambient temperature error (low temperature)] ⇒ 299
☎ [Ambient temperature thermistor error] ⇒ 300
☎ [Analyzer communication error] ⇒ 303
[Aspiration unit left-right motor error] ⇒ 302
☎ [Aspiration unit up-down motor error] ⇒ 301
[AutoLoader error] ⇒ 308
[Automatic FCS file output failed] ⇒ 307
[Auto report printing has failed.] ⇒ 310
B [Background check error] ⇒ 306
C [Cannot get order from host Computer] ⇒ 310
[Can't read rotor No.] ⇒ 308
[Cleaning is required] ⇒ 307
[Could not measure specified aspiration time] ⇒ 306
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
296/314
[CyFlow SHEATH has expired] ⇒ 307
D [Drain chamber 1 pinch valve error] ⇒ 301
[Drain chamber 2 pinch valve error] ⇒ 301
F ☎ [FCM cover is open] ⇒ 307
☎ [FCM guide liquid chamber thermistor error] ⇒ 300
[FCM sheath chamber 1 aspiration error] ⇒ 300
[FCM sheath chamber 2 aspiration error] ⇒ 300
H [Host communication failure occurred.] ⇒ 310
[Host communication message is inconsistency] ⇒ 310
I [Inconsistent information sent from pre-processing unit] ⇒ 309
☎ [Internal Error] ⇒ 303
[Invalid Panel is specified (autoloader measurement)] ⇒ 309
L ☎ [Leak sensor 1 error] ⇒ 301
☎ [Leak sensor 2 error] ⇒ 301
[L-J error] ⇒ 304
N [No tubes are in tube holder.] ⇒ 302
O [Out of CyFlow SHEATH] ⇒ 300
P [Particle detection error] ⇒ 305
[PDF output of Auto report failed.] ⇒ 310
[Perform cleaning (warning)] ⇒ 308
[Press Manual analysis start switch] ⇒ 305
Q [QC error] ⇒ 304
[QC material has expired] ⇒ 305
R [Replace air pump.] ⇒ 307
[Rinse cup valve error] ⇒ 301
[Rotor drawer table error] ⇒ 308
[Rotor initial position error] ⇒ 308
S [Sample aspiration motor error] ⇒ 301
[Sample is too dense] ⇒ 306
[Sheath motor 1 error] ⇒ 301
[Sheath motor 2 error] ⇒ 301
T [The rotor is set in the opposite direction.] ⇒ 309
[The specified number of events has not been reached.] ⇒ 306
[Tube holder motor error] ⇒ 302
[Tube is not set on rotor.] ⇒ 309
[Tube is remaining in the rotor.] ⇒ 309
Error Message Action
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
297/314
[Tube remains in tube holder] ⇒ 302
[Two tubes are in tube holder] ⇒ 302
U [Unmeasured Workitem not active] ⇒ 302
W [Wash chamber aspiration error] ⇒ 300
[Wash chamber not draining] ⇒ 300
[Waste chamber 1 not draining] ⇒ 300
[Waste chamber 2 not draining] ⇒ 300
[Waste tank is full] ⇒ 300
☎ [Water leak 1 detected (analysis not possible)] ⇒ 301
☎ [Water leak 2 detected (analysis not possible)] ⇒ 301
[Worklist and the rotor which is set are different.] ⇒ 309
[Worklist and the tube set in rotor are different.] ⇒ 309
Y [You are trying to manually measure a workitem for an autoloader] ⇒ 307
Error Message Action
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
298/314
18.2 [Help] dialog box
When an error occurs, or a maintenance task or cleaning becomes necessary, the following [Help] dialog box
appears. Follow the instructions in the message in the [Action] field. (➤P.299 "18.3 Causes of errors and remedial
actions")
[Reset Alarm] Click to stop the alarm.
[Error Message List] Displays current errors. If multiple errors exist, errors are listed in order of priority.
[Action] Displays the troubleshooting actions for the selected error. Depending on the type of
error, this field may be blank.
[Execute]/[Accept] Depending on the error type, either [Execute] or [Accept] appears.
Clicking [Execute] performs the action displayed in the [Action] field.
Clicking [Accept] clears the error.
[Close] Click to close the [Help] dialog box.
Note:
• When an error occurs, you can display the [Help] dialog box.
Click the in the status area.
• All alarms sounding on the IPU will stop when you click [Reset Alarm] in the [Help] dialog box or press
any key on the keyboard.
[Help] dialog box
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
299/314
18.3 Causes of errors and remedial actions
When an error occurs, the [Help] dialog box appears. Refer to the causes and actions described below and take the
appropriate action.
If there is more than one possible cause, take action in the order.
Errors related to pressure
Errors related to temperature
Risk of infection
When taking remedial action to handle an error, always wear adequate personal protective equipment such
as protective gloves, a protective mask, protective eyewear, and a lab coat. Wash your hands with
antiseptic solution after completing the task.
There is a risk of infection.
[Abnormal pressure loss]
Probable cause Action
The air pump has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
An air pump test is executed.
[0.06MPa pressure error]
Probable cause Action
The 0.06 MPa relief valve has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
An air pump test is executed.
[-0.03MPa pressure error]
Probable cause Action
The -0.03 MPa relief valve has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
An air pump test is executed.
[Ambient temperature error (high temperature)], [Ambient temperature error (low temperature)]
Probable cause Action
The ambient temperature (environmental temperature) is
either:
• >38 °C (high temperature error)
• < 5 °C (low temperature error)
Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check [Environment Temp.] in the [Sensor Display] (Sensor 1)
dialog box that appears and adjust the room temperature.
(➤P.283 "Chapter 17: 17.12 Checking the instrument status
(sensors)")
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
300/314
Errors related to reagents and chambers
[Ambient temperature thermistor error], [FCM guide liquid chamber thermistor error]
Probable cause Action
The thermistor in the unit has malfunctioned, or there is a
circuit break.
Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
The instrument requires servicing. Contact your authorized
local Sysmex representative.
[Out of CyFlow SHEATH]
Probable cause Action
Case 1:
There is a foreign object pressing on the tubing connected to
the reagent container, or there is a kink in the tubing.
Remove the object that is pressing on the tubing, and/or
straighten the tubing.
Case 2:
The reagent has run out.
Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The [Reagent Replacement] dialog box appears. Replace the
reagent. For details, see the following:
(➤P.271 "Chapter 17: 17.5.2 Replacing the reagent")
[FCM sheath chamber 1 aspiration error], [FCM sheath chamber 2 aspiration error],
[Wash chamber aspiration error]
Probable cause Action
• The tubing connected to the reagent container is clogged.
• There is a foreign object pressing on the tubing connected
to the reagent container, or there is a kink in the tubing.
Check the condition of the tubes, and then click [Execute] in
the [Help] dialog box.
Reagent replenishment takes place.
[Waste chamber 1 not draining], [Waste chamber 2 not draining]
Probable cause Action
The drain tubing is clogged. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The waste chamber is drained.
[Wash chamber not draining]
Probable cause Action
The drain tubing is clogged. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The sample is drained from the rinse chamber.
[Waste tank is full]
Probable cause Action
The waste container is full. Replace the waste container, and then click [Accept] in the
[Help] dialog box. To replace the waste container, see the
following:
(➤P.268 "Chapter 17: 17.3 Replacing the waste container")
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
301/314
Errors related to motors
[Water leak 1 detected (analysis not possible)], [Water leak 2 detected (analysis not possible)]
Probable cause Action
There is a liquid leak inside the analyzer. Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer and wipe off
the liquid if the instrument is wet.
The instrument requires servicing. Contact your authorized
local Sysmex representative.
[Leak sensor 1 error], [Leak sensor 2 error]
Probable cause Action
The liquid leak sensor has malfunctioned. Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
The instrument requires servicing. Contact your authorized
local Sysmex representative.
[Rinse cup valve error], [Drain chamber 1 pinch valve error],
[Drain chamber 2 pinch valve error]
Probable cause Action
The pinch valve has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
A pinch valve test is executed.
If the error does not clear, the instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Sample aspiration motor error]
Probable cause Action
The sample aspiration motor has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
A sample aspiration motor test is executed.
If the error does not clear, the instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Sheath motor 1 error], [Sheath motor 2 error]
Probable cause Action
The sheath motor has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
A sheath motor test is executed.
If the error does not clear, the instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Aspiration unit up-down motor error]
Probable cause Action
The aspiration unit up-down motor has malfunctioned. Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
The instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
302/314
Errors related to the sample holder
Errors related to the orders
[Aspiration unit left-right motor error]
Probable cause Action
The aspiration unit left-right motor has malfunctioned. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
An aspiration unit motor test is executed.
If the error does not clear, the instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Tube holder motor error]
Probable cause Action
The sample tube holder motor has malfunctioned. Remove the sample tube, and then click [Execute] in the
[Help] dialog box.
A tube holder motor test is executed.
If the error does not clear, the instrument requires servicing.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Tube remains in tube holder]
Probable cause Action
• There was a tube remaining in the sample tube holder when
the instrument started up.
• There was a tube remaining in the sample tube holder when
the analysis mode was switched to manual analysis mode.
Remove the remaining tube from the tube holder and click
[Accept].
[Two tubes are in tube holder]
Probable cause Action
Both a regular sample tube and a micro collection tube are set
for manual analysis.
Remove the sample tube that will not be run, and then click
[Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
[No tubes are in tube holder]
Probable cause Action
No sample tube is placed in the sample tube holder. Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Place a sample tube.
[Unmeasured Workitem not active]
Probable cause Action
No unmeasured workitem is activated at the time of manual
analysis.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Activate the workitem you want to run and then execute
analysis.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
303/314
Errors related to the laser
Errors related to the system
[488 nm laser life], [638 nm laser life], [405 nm laser life]
Probable cause Action
Laser replacement is required. Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Laser replacement is required. Contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
[488 nm laser output error], [638 nm laser output error], [405 nm laser output error]
Probable cause Action
The laser output exceeded the control range. Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
Laser replacement is required. Contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
[Analyzer communication error]
Probable cause Action
There was a communication error between the device and the
IPU.
Remove the sample tube from the device, and then turn off
and on the main power to the system.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
[Internal Error]
Probable cause Action
A program operation error occurred. Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
Contact your authorized local Sysmex representative.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
304/314
Errors related to quality control (QC)
[L-J error]
Probable cause Action
A QC error (value over the control limit value) occurred. Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box and check the L-J
charts. Check the quality control material. Prepare the quality
control material as needed and rerun the daily QC.
• If the error persists
Execute cleaning. For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
• If the error still persists
Perform baseline setup again then re-run daily QC.
For baseline setup, see the following:
(➤P.71 "Chapter 9: 9.8 Performing baseline setup")
For performing daily QC, see the following:
(➤P.74 "Chapter 9: 9.9 Performing daily QC")
• If the error still occurs after you have taken all the above
actions, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
[QC error]
Probable cause Action
Concentration of the quality control material is too high or low,
or hardware-related errors exist.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box and check the quality
control material. Prepare the quality control material as
needed and rerun the material.
• If the error persists
Execute cleaning. For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
• If the error still persists
Perform baseline setup again then re-run daily QC.
For baseline setup, see the following:
(➤P.71 "Chapter 9: 9.8 Performing baseline setup")
For performing daily QC, see the following:
(➤P.74 "Chapter 9: 9.9 Performing daily QC")
• If the error still occurs after you have taken all the above
actions, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
305/314
Errors related to analysis
[Particle detection error]
Probable cause Action
Concentration of the quality control material is too high or low,
or hardware-related errors exist.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box and check the quality
control material. Prepare the quality control material as
needed and rerun the material.
• If the error persists
Execute cleaning. For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
• If the error still persists
Perform baseline setup again then re-run daily QC.
For baseline setup, see the following:
(➤P.71 "Chapter 9: 9.8 Performing baseline setup")
For performing daily QC, see the following:
(➤P.74 "Chapter 9: 9.9 Performing daily QC")
• If the error still occurs after you have taken all the above
actions, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
[QC material has expired]
Probable cause Action
QC material has expired. Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Use a new QC bead lot to execute QC analysis.
When using a new lot, the lot information must be registered in
a new QC file.
[Press Manual analysis start switch]
Probable cause Action
The set time (2 hours) has elapsed since the XF-1600 entered
standby state.
Press the manual analysis start switch.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
306/314
[Background check error]
Probable cause Action
• Air bubbles have formed in the detector.
• The detector is clogged.
• The detector is dirty.
Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
Auto rinsing and a background check are performed.
• If the error persists
Execute cleaning. For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
When cleaning ends, click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
Auto rinsing and a background check are performed.
• If the error still occurs after you have taken the above action
Replace the reagent.
To replace the reagent, see the following:
(➤P.271 "Chapter 17: 17.5.2 Replacing the reagent")
When reagent replacement ends, click [Execute] in the
[Help] dialog box.
Auto rinsing and a background check are performed.
[The specified number of events has not been reached.]
Probable cause Action
• Insufficient sample.
• Sample concentration is too low.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check the sample and measurement conditions.
[Sample is too dense]
Probable cause Action
The sample has not been preprocessed appropriately. Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check the sample and measurement conditions.
[Could not measure specified aspiration time]
Probable cause Action
This error occurs when [Stop Time] is checked with a specific
number of seconds as stop conditions, and one of the
following has occurred:
• Acquisition conditions were changed during acquisition (the
time before changing conditions is lost).
• When both [Stop Time] (with a specific number of seconds)
and [Stop Condition] (with a specific event count) are
checked as stop conditions, the specified event count was
reached before the specified stop time.
• When manual analysis mode was selected, and the run was
stopped before the specified stop time.
Click [Accept]. Check the measurement conditions and rerun
the sample as needed.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
307/314
Errors related to covers
Errors related to user maintenance and warnings
[You are trying to manually measure a workitem for an autoloader]
Probable cause Action
An auto-loader workitem was activated when (Start ) in the
status area was clicked in manual analysis mode or the
manual start switch on the analyzer was pressed.
Check if the workitem you want to run is activated. Follow the
process according to the analysis mode for that workitem.
[Automatic FCS file output failed]
Probable cause Action
• There is not enough free space on the hard disk drive.
• The logged-on user does not have access to the folder
specified in [Output] under [IPU Settings].
Export the FCS file manually.
[FCM cover is open]
Probable cause Action
The FCM cover is open. Close the cover.
If the error persists, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
[Replace air pump.]
Probable cause Action
It is time to replace the air pump. The air pump needs to be
replaced when the accumulated operating time exceeds
500 hours since the last replacement.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Shut down the instrument.
(➤P.53 "Chapter 8: 8.3 Shutdown")
Turn off the main power switch on the analyzer.
Replace the air pump. For details, see the following:
(➤P.286 "Chapter 17: 17.14 Replacing the air pump")
[CyFlow SHEATH has expired]
Probable cause Action
A reagent has expired. Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The [Reagent Replacement] dialog box appears. Replace the
reagent. For details, see the following:
(➤P.271 "Chapter 17: 17.5.2 Replacing the reagent")
[Cleaning is required]
Probable cause Action
It is time to execute cleaning. Cleaning should be performed
every 100 measurements.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Execute cleaning. For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
308/314
Errors related to the auto loader
[Perform cleaning (warning)]
Probable cause Action
Cleaning needs to be conducted. Cleaning must be performed
if more than 7 days have passed since the last cleaning.
Click [Execute] in the [Help] dialog box.
The [Cleaning] dialog box appears on the screen.
You cannot run samples until the cleaning is complete.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.273 "Chapter 17: 17.6 Cleaning")
[Rotor initial position error]
Probable cause Action
• An error occurred while initializing the auto-loader as the
instrument started up.
• An error occurred while initializing the auto-loader when the
analysis mode was switched to auto-loader analysis mode.
Click [Execute]. An auto loader motor test will be executed.
If the error still occurs, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
[AutoLoader error]
Probable cause Action
• The auto-loader encountered an error as the instrument
started up.
• The auto-loader malfunctioned while measurement was
being performed.
Click [Execute]. An auto loader motor test will be executed.
If the error still occurs, contact your authorized local Sysmex
representative.
[Rotor drawer table error]
Probable cause Action
The auto-loader is open or is not closed properly. Check if the auto loader is closed completely and click
[Accept]. If the error still occurs, contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
[Can't read rotor No.]
Probable cause Action
• The rotor has not been placed in the auto loader.
• There is no barcode label on the rotor, or the instrument
was unable to scan the barcode.
Click [Accept]. Check if the rotor is placed in the auto loader
and/or the barcode label on the rotor is properly attached and
readable.
For details on the rotor barcode label, see the following:
(➤P.47 "Chapter 7: 7.3.1 Barcode labels for rotors")
Place the rotor on the auto loader again and start the run.
If the problem persists, there is a possibility of a barcode
reading error. Conduct a barcode reader test.
For details on the barcode reader test, see the following:
(➤P.285 "Chapter 17: 17.13 Barcode reader test")
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
309/314
[The rotor is set in the opposite direction.]
Probable cause Action
The loaded rotor is not positioned properly. Click [Accept]. Check if the rotor is properly set. For details
about placing the rotor, see the following:
(➤P.168 "Chapter 12: 12.3.1 Running samples with the auto
loader (auto loader analysis)", steps 7 to 9)
After setting the rotor again, resume the run.
[Tube is not set on rotor.]
Probable cause Action
No secondary tube is placed in the rotor. Click [Accept].
Place secondary tubes in the rotor and set the rotor again.
[Worklist and the tube set in rotor are different.]
Probable cause Action
The number and/or positions of secondary tubes in the rotor
are different from the selected workitems in the [Workitem List
(Auto Loader)].
Click [Accept]. Check the number and positions of the tubes in
the rotor and the corresponding worklist information.
[Worklist and the rotor which is set are different.]
Probable cause Action
The type of rotor is different from the registered rotor. Click [Accept] and confirm the barcode label on the rotor and
the number in the worklist.
[Tube is remaining in the rotor.]
Probable cause Action
There was a tube in the rotor when the instrument started up. Remove the tube from the rotor and click [Accept].
[Invalid Panel is specified (autoloader measurement)]
Probable cause Action
Panel/Subset panel names received from the PS-10 are not
registered in the XF-1600.
Check the registered panel/subset panel names in both the
PS-10 and XF-1600 and ensure they match.
[Inconsistent information sent from pre-processing unit]
Probable cause Action
Host interface specification between the XF-1600 and the PS-
10 does not match.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box. Contact your
authorized local Sysmex representative for assistance.
Chapter 18 Troubleshooting
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
310/314
Errors related to communications
[Host communication failure occurred.]
Probable cause Action
Communication error occurred during query to the host
computer.
Communication information from the host computer may be
inconsistent.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check the host computer version.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
If the versions are consistent, contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
[Host communication message is inconsistency.]
Probable cause Action
Communication information from the host computer is
inconsistent.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check the host computer version.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
If the versions are consistent, contact your authorized local
Sysmex representative.
[Cannot get order from host Computer]
Probable cause Action
The order information from the host computer does not match
the query from the IPU.
Click [Accept] in the [Help] dialog box.
Check the order information registered in the host computer.
For details, see the following:
(➤P.251 "Chapter 15: 15.4.15 Host computer")
[Auto report printing has failed.]
Probable cause Action
The graphic printer is not properly connected to the
instrument.
Check if the graphic printer is properly connected to the
instrument, and manually print the report.
[PDF output of Auto report failed.]
Probable cause Action
There is not enough free space on the hard disk drive, or the
logged-on user does not have access to the specified folder.
Check the space on the hard disk drive or the user's access
right to the folder, and export the PDF manually.
Index
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
311/314
314
Index
AA
larm sound settings .......................................255
Analysis conditions
Acquisition conditions settings.....................164
Setting .........................................................163
Stop conditions settings...............................166
Analyzer .............................................................29
Analyzer settings
Alarm sound settings ...................................255
Auto loader ..................................................256
Dialog box....................................................236
Initialize........................................................254
Instrument....................................................255
Restore........................................................254
Save ............................................................253
Auto loader.......................................................256
Auto rinse.........................................................269
Avoiding infection...............................................17
B
Backup
Analyzer settings .........................................254
IPU settings .................................................239
Panel ...........................................................128
Panel QC files..............................................161
QC File ..........................................................85
Workitem .....................................................120
Baseline
Execution period............................................64
Overview........................................................64
Saving as an FCS format (Cytometer QC) ....87
Setup .............................................................71
Basic operation ..................................................49
CC
auses of errors and remedial actions ............299
Errors related to analysis.............................305
Errors related to communications................310
Errors related to covers ...............................307
Errors related to motors...............................301
Errors related to pressure............................299
Errors related to quality control (QC)...........304
Errors related to reagents and chambers ....300
Errors related to temperature ......................299
Errors related to the laser ............................303
Errors related to the orders..........................302
Errors related to the sample holder .............302
Errors related to the system ............... 303, 308
Errors related to user maintenance and
warnings .........................................307
Changing the display language........................240
Checking daily panel QC results......................154
Checking logs.................................................. 257
Cleaning .......................................................... 273
[Compensation] ............................................... 193
Computer viruses .............................................. 21
Consumables .................................................... 33
Creating a report ............................................. 211
Cybersecurity .................................................... 22
Cycle counter .................................................. 281
D
Daily QC
Analysis ........................................................ 74
Checking results ........................................... 78
Execution period ........................................... 65
Overview....................................................... 65
Saving as an FCS format (Cytometer QC) ... 86
Types............................................................ 65
Data analysis
[Add Plot] .................................................... 188
[Apply]......................................................... 202
[Backup]...................................................... 181
[Compensation]........................................... 193
[Display] ...................................................... 205
[Edit]............................................................ 190
[Export] ....................................................... 179
[Gate] .......................................................... 183
[Histogram Style] ........................................ 192
[Item]........................................................... 205
[Parent Gate] .............................................. 189
[Print] .......................................................... 180
[Restore] ..................................................... 182
[Scaling] ...................................................... 191
[Statistics] ................................................... 204
Date format settings ........................................ 241
Dimensions/weight ............................................ 39
Display ............................................................ 240
Displaying cytometer QC results....................... 82
Disposal of materials......................................... 19
E
Electrical ratings................................................ 39
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ................ 17
Error messages............................................... 295
Export
[Export L-J Charts As PDF] ........................ 180
[Export Plot(s) As Image File] ..................... 179
[Export Statistics As CSV] .......................... 180
[Export Report As PDF] .............................. 180
F
Facility Information .......................................... 240
Index
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
312/314
GG
ain/PMT settings........................................... 168
Grounding ......................................................... 37
H
[Help] dialog box ............................................. 298
Host computer................................................. 251
I
Initialize
IPU settings ................................................ 239
Installation ................................................... 16, 37
Preparing for installation ............................... 37
Instrument ....................................................... 255
Intended purpose .............................................. 10
Introduction ......................................................... 9
IPU (Information Processing Unit)..................... 32
IPU settings
Account Lockout ......................................... 246
Auto-validate............................................... 248
Date format settings.................................... 241
Dialog box................................................... 234
Display ........................................................ 240
Facility information settings ........................ 240
Host computer ............................................ 251
Initialize....................................................... 239
Output......................................................... 249
Password manage settings......................... 245
Printer settings............................................ 253
PS-10.......................................................... 252
Restore ....................................................... 239
Save............................................................ 238
Security settings ......................................... 250
System Language....................................... 240
User administration settings ....................... 241
Work Area................................................... 247
Workitem..................................................... 247
Worklist ....................................................... 246
L
Laser ................................................................. 18
Laser class ........................................................ 39
List of access privileges for each user
authority ......................................................... 61
List of maintenance tasks................................ 265
L-J charts
Cursor data management..................... 82, 159
Vial line ................................................. 83, 160
Logoff ................................................................ 56
Logon ................................................................ 51
Logs
[Audit Log] screen ....................................... 261
[Error Log] screen ....................................... 261
Filter ............................................................ 258
[Maintenance Log] screen........................... 263
Output in CSV format.................................. 259
[Reagent Replacement Log] screen ........... 262
Screens....................................................... 257
M
Main screen....................................................... 57
Maintenance...................................................... 18
Maintenance and inspection checklist............. 294
Maintenance menu.......................................... 266
Manage settings .............................................. 238
Managing analyzer settings............................. 253
Managing panel QC files ................................. 161
Manual............................................................... 10
N
Noise level......................................................... 39
Notice to the user .............................................. 27
O
Operating environment...................................... 39
Operation flow ................................................... 49
Operation tests ................................................ 277
Air pump...................................................... 277
Aspiration unit motor ................................... 278
Auto loader motor ....................................... 279
Barcode reader ........................................... 285
Pinch valve.................................................. 278
Sample aspiration motor............................. 278
Sheath motor .............................................. 278
Tube holder motor....................................... 279
Operators .......................................................... 20
Options .............................................................. 34
Overall cytometer QC workflow......................... 63
Overall operation flow........................................ 49
Overall panel QC and setup flow..................... 131
Overview of measuring samples ..................... 163
Overview of panel QC (baseline setup and
daily panel QC)............................................. 132
Overview of the data analysis ......................... 177
Overview of the system ..................................... 10
P
Panel
Backup........................................................ 128
Copy............................................................ 126
Delete.......................................................... 127
Modify ......................................................... 124
Register......................................................... 96
Restore ....................................................... 129
Panel List........................................................... 94
Panel QC......................................................... 131
Index
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
313/314
Panel QC files ..................................................133
Panel QC screen..............................................133
Part names and functions ..................................29
Password management ...................................245
Performing daily panel QC...............................147
[Print L-J Charts]..........................................180
[Print Report] ...............................................180
Printer settings .................................................253
PS-10 ...............................................................252
C data..................................................... 82, 159
QC files
Backup...........................................................85
Delete ............................................................85
Modify............................................................84
Overview........................................................65
Register .........................................................69
Restore..........................................................86
QC screen
L-J charts.............................................. 79, 155
QC file............................................................66
QC work area ................................................68
Radar chart....................................................78
Quality control (QC) ...........................................63
Overview........................................................64
screen............................................................66
Quality control materials ....................................18
RR
eagent replacement.............................. 270, 271
Dialog box....................................................270
Reagent replenishment....................................280
Reagent volume used........................................50
Reagents..................................................... 18, 35
List .................................................................35
Registering a panel and corresponding subset
panels ...........................................................136
Registering a panel QC file ..............................137
Removing flowcell air bubbles .........................275
Replacing a fuse ..............................................292
Replacing the air pump....................................286
Replacing the waste container.........................268
Report
[Arrange]......................................................230
[Edit] ............................................................229
[Insert Capture]............................................226
[Insert Item]..................................................228
[Insert Link] ..................................................226
[Page Setup]................................................225
Property area...............................................212
[Reports] tab ................................................209
[Zoom] .........................................................229
Restore
Analyzer settings ........................................ 253
IPU settings ................................................ 238
Panel........................................................... 129
QC File..................................................86, 162
Workitem..................................................... 121
Ribbon menu................................................... 179
[Compensation] tab..................................... 193
[Hierarchy] tab ............................................ 207
[Home] tab .................................................. 183
[Report] tab.........................................210, 225
[Statistics] tab ............................................. 203
[View] tab.................................................... 191
[XF-1600 File] tab ....................................... 179
Rinsing the flowcell ......................................... 275
S
Safety information ............................................. 15
Safety labels on the instrument......................... 23
Safety standards ............................................... 39
Sample analysis .............................................. 163
Analysis ...................................................... 168
Sample tubes .................................................... 43
Screen lock ....................................................... 56
Screen lock timer ............................................ 250
Screen transition area ....................................... 58
Self-test ............................................................. 52
Sensors ........................................................... 283
Settings
Analyzer...................................................... 236
Dialog box................................................... 234
IPU.............................................................. 234
IPU settings ................................................ 238
Settings available for each user authority... 232
Settings by objective................................... 231
Shutdown .......................................................... 53
Specifications .................................................... 39
Fluidics.......................................................... 42
Optics............................................................ 41
Performance ................................................. 40
Physical specifications.................................. 39
Software specifications ................................. 42
Specified conditions of use................................ 15
Startup............................................................... 50
Status area ........................................................ 59
Storage conditions............................................. 39
Subset panel
Copy ........................................................... 126
Delete ......................................................... 127
Modify ......................................................... 124
Register ........................................................ 98
Subset panel list................................................ 95
Subset panel master ....................................... 124
Updating ..................................................... 124
Supply parts ...................................................... 33
Index
XF-1600 Instructions for Use
314/314
Supported rotors ............................................... 46
Symbols related to the products........................ 12
Symbols used in this manual ............................ 11
System language ............................................ 240
T
Threshold settings........................................... 168
Trademarks ....................................................... 13
Turning OFF the power ..................................... 53
Turning ON the power ....................................... 51
Inspection ..................................................... 50
U
Use of other software ........................................ 21
User administration settings............................ 241
User settings ................................................... 231
W Workarea......................................................... 178
Workitem
Backup........................................................ 120
Delete ......................................................... 116
Merge.......................................................... 121
Modify ......................................................... 108
Output......................................................... 119
Register ...................................................... 100
Restore ....................................................... 121
Saving in FCS format.................................. 118
Validate....................................................... 117
Worklist ............................................................. 92
Worklist area ..................................................... 89
[Panel Master] tab......................................... 94
[Worklist] tab................................................. 89
Worklist commands........................................... 90
Legal information
Legal information
Importer to EU
Sysmex Europe SE
Bornbarch 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany
Phone: +49 40 5 27 26-0 / Fax: +49 40 5 27 26-100
Responsible person for United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
Sysmex UK Ltd
Sysmex House, Garamonde Drive,
Wymbush, Milton Keynes, MK8 8DF, United Kingdom
The system described in this manual is compliant with the Medical Devices